RIB Spain SA +34 914 483 800

Rodríguez San Pedro 10 info@rib-software.es

28015 Madrid www.rib-software.es

Presto Manual

Using Presto 1

Use interface 2

Fields 4

Windows 6

Editing items 8

Layouts 15

Filter elements 22

Text windows 24

Presto in the design stage 28

Estimate 28

Stages and activities 53

Integration to BIM 75

Measurement of CAD drawing 75

An information system 80

Presto in the planning stage 102

Economic planning 102

Financial planning 113

Temporary planning 115

Plan-It: Convert the estimate planning 129

Primavera and Project link 134

Presto in project management 137

Tender bid for complete work 137

The certification 138

Cost tracking 145

Presto for construction company 150

Procurement and subcontracting 150

Production 164

Invoices 167

Centralized invoicing 180

Analysis of costs and expenses 183

Menus and options 192

File 192

EDITION 208

VIEW 208

Reference 244

Tools 244

Processes 245

Plugins 247

Calculations 248

REPORTS 248

Window 252

Help 252

Tutorial of estimates 255

1 Creation of concepts 255

2 Take-offs 262

3 Completion estimate 264

4 Printing and connection with other programs 266

5 Certifications 268

Cost tutorial 272

1 Estimate of estimated cost 272

2 Purchases 274

3 Invoices 280

4 Orders and deliveries 286

5 Calculation of actual costs 288

Design report 292

File 293

VER 294

Tools 304

Section 306

Expression builder 308

Link to Excel and Access 312

Excel 312

Access 313

Appendix I. Technical documentation 315

Directories and files 315

User restrictions 316

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 1

Using Presto

In addition to this manual, there are other resources for learning to use Presto in

www.rib-software.es section “Presto”, section “Using Presto”.

Training

Know the official centers and certified trainers Presto, attend our webinars or hire our

online courses and customized.

Support

See doubts concerning the latest version free e-mail and from the “HELP: Send inquiry

to Presto” or hire our personalized service.

Technical notes

Find detailed processes, ideas and examples of using Presto.

Technical questions

Solve the most frequent questions on the use and installation of Presto made by users.

You can also access from Presto in the “FAQ: Frequently asked” menu.

Books about Presto

Discover and request publications available.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 2

Use interface

Presto windows.

Presto uses the Windows usual criteria to manage windows, menus and options.

Frames and main windows

The information of the options of the menu “VIEW” as “Estimate” or “Gantt Chart “, is

displayed in main windows, which appear as tabs within a common framework.

A frame may be split by dragging a tab to the edge of the initial frame. The frames are

all horizontal or vertical and always completely fill the main window Presto, without

overlaps or gaps. You can move tabs between different frameworks and adjust the

width or height of each frame.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 3

The options in the “WINDOW” menu open predefined combinations of main windows,

targeting the most common processes of Presto, which can be modified by adding or

removing windows.

Close they are pressing on the blade or the middle mouse button on the tab of the

main window.

Subordinate windows

Each main window in turn may have subordinate windows, like “TakeOff” or “Text”,

which appear as tabs within a subordinate frame.

These subordinate tabs can be dragged to alter your choice, either floating or within its

framework.

Close they are pressing on the blade of each subject or the middle mouse button on

the tab of the subordinate.

Other windows

The “CAD” and “Design report” options open separate windows in the overview win-

dow.

The options “Working environment” and “Project settings” open dialog boxes.

Access to options

Each option icon and column header has a clue, or brief help text that is displayed

when the cursor.

The toolbar offers contextual options to choose the bars to include in the main window.

The options accessible through menus with the left mouse button, indicated by listing

the succession of options, starting with the main menu, which is written in capital let-

ters:

FILE: New: Path

It refers to the “Path” box on the “New” from the “FILE” menu. When several followed

the same menu options, only the last is indicated.

Options accessible via context menus

It appears with the mouse right button, and depend on the location of the cursor:

• At the head of a column, applied to the entire column, such as “Hide column”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 4

• On a table field or the central area of a window, apply the countryside or the

entire row, such as color filters.

<option name>

Shape that indicated in the manual the contextual options.

Function keys or accelerators

[Shift + F7]

The key or key combination in brackets, separated by “+” is indicated. The combina-

tions are to be pressed simultaneously.

Fields

Most estimate data is stored in tables containing similar data sets. Each element of a

table has a set of fields with a fixed meaning, as the code or price.

The list of all tables with all possible fields, you can see in the dialog box and expres-

sions builder in the “Field List” option from the “REPORTS: Design reports” window.

The track that appears when the cursor is on the top of each field displays a descriptive

summary.

Each field is identified by a name that should be added as a prefix the table name as it

should be used in expressions and reports. The repetitions of the same table are ig-

nored.

For example, the code of a concept is identified as:

Concepts.Code

Editing fields

The editable fields can be modified to slow double click or [F2].

You can also copy the values from the next fields:

Copy the field above or [F9]

It copies the contents of the top field in the active field or in the selected range of

fields.

Copy field left or [Shift + F9]

Copy the contents of the field to the left of the active field.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 5

Autofill fields

Many fields are automatically filled with the appropriate values to each field, such as

provinces, suppliers, measurement units, or prices. Refer to “Suggest” or “[F7]”.

Fields lists

Values not modifiable by the user, such as categories or forms of payment for maturi-

ties.

Date fields

It displays a calendar to select a date. You can manually change, and if not completed,

and the appropriate values are added.

Suggest

The button to the right of the active field proposes a list of useful values to fill by click-

ing on chosen value, or other information concerning the same.

Campo Suggestion

Price Prices adjusted to inflation or geographical areas

Code Automatic codes for new concepts

Code2 Decimal coding of the concept

Summary Conversion case sensitive

City City or town corresponding to the zip code

Quantity Inverse of the quantity or performance

Unit Standardized units of measure

Duration Estimation by costs and returns

The first suggested value is the current value of the field.

The list will automatically filtering if a character is typed. This list can be sorted by any

column by clicking the right mouse button in the header.

If a column or selected range, there are two types of suggests:

• Fixed, which is filled exactly the same value in all selected fields.

• Calculated, in which each field takes on a different value, such as “Convert to

uppercase”. They identify with the magenta color.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 6

Suggest or [F7]

Equivalent to press the button, but after accepting the value, is passed to the next field,

so that you can hold on to fill several fields simultaneously.

[Shift + F7]

Similar to the previous option, but going to the inferior field.

Windows

All Presto windows, except text ones and graphics, displays information of tables.

To move in these windows, in addition to the standard options of Windows, you can

use the following keys and combinations:

Action Effect

[Intro] (numeric keyboard) It acts as the [Tab] key of the main keyboard.

[Begin]

[End]

It goes to the first field of the row.

It goes to the last field of the row.

[Ctrl] + [Ini]

[Ctrl] + [End]

It goes to the first field and element of the table.

It goes to the last element of the table.

“Previous”

“Next”

Move to the previous and next element of the table.

“First element”

“Last element”

It goes to the first and last element.

Quick Fill Data

The “Last item” option moves to the last item in the table faster than in the normal

padding, but not allowed to work in other windows at once.

You can return normal mode by pressing “Cancel”.

Active concept

It is the concept which the information is displayed in different windows subordinate

estimates.

Double click some windows placed the concept as active:

• Main “concepts”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 7

• Main “Measurements”.

• Main “Activities” subordinate “Work items”.

Specific Resources of the “Estimates” window

Action Effect on “Estimate” window

Route in the header Path from the root concept to the active concept, which

allows access to any of the parent concepts, as well as

the previous and the next level.

Double-click in the header

Icon ”Up”

Upgrade to superior concept.

Double clicking in a concept Go down to the lower concepts.

“Previous”

“Next”

They goes same level concepts without up and down on

successively.

“First element”

“Last element”

They move to the first or last item of the same level.

Double click documents related fields

This action can open other windows down on the field, properly filtering the infor-

mation displayed.

In the main “Entities”, the document window justifying the amount on which you dou-

ble-click opens done.

In the subordinate “Supplies”, open the document you double-click is performed.

In the main “Maturity,” the bill opens the corresponding maturity.

Go to concept

It let searching for concepts from the full codes or initials. The list of concepts to

choose progressively is reduced as being written mask concept.

Hierarchical windows

The windows “Tree”, “Dairy” and “Gantt chart” are hierarchical.

Hierarchical windows have a similar behaviour than table windows, but do not support

filters and always have all the information that corresponds to the selection from the

dropdown list.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 8

You can choose the visible levels with the drop-down list showing the hierarchy levels,

or with the symbols [+] and [-] to the left of each concept; whether to display the list

there are items selected, only open the levels corresponding to those elements.

Double-clicking on any field opens or closes the level.

Editing items

Add elements

To insert elements, some tables require first filling required fields, such as code or doc-

ument concept.

Action Procedure

Add a line at the end [Enter] or cursor down from the last line.

Collate a line “Insert line” or [Insert].

Drag and drop You can do this from another window of the same project or

from another project; the cursor takes a rectangular shape.

If the destination is the “Tree” window, the dragged item is

placed in the last position of the target level.

Selection of elements

Most actions on the elements of a table can be applied to all elements or a selection.

You can select:

Selection Clicking and dragging on

Lines Numerical box to the left.

Columns Column header.

Ranges A cell or a rectangular group of contiguous cells.

To check and uncheck groups of rows or columns, use the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key, with the

usual standard in Windows.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 9

Select all

Option from the “Edit” menu to select all the items in the active window. Equivalent to [Ctrl

+ E]. In table windows equivalent to clicking on the top left corner, when there is not select-

ed row.

Invert selection

Option from the “Edit” menu that reverses the current selection. In table windows equivalent

to clicking on the upper left corner.

Deselect

Option from the “EDIT” menu which removes the current selection. Equivalent to click-

ing on any cell outside the range selected.

Mask selection | Mask unselection

On a column header, select rows based on the contents of the selected column.

Non selected items are still visible, unlike the filter options that eliminate temporarily

window elements that do not match the conditions.

Analyze table

This option, available in all Presto non-hierarchical tables as “Take-off lines”, “Concepts”

or “Variables” creates a tree on two levels with a combination of two fields of the table,

shows the number of elements corresponding to each combination and optionally al-

lows you to select the elements of one or more nodes.

For example it allows:

• In the take-off lines table you can get the elements grouped by plants and,

within each plant, by areas.

• In the table of concepts can be obtained the elements grouped by natures and

in each, the units of measurement used.

• In the table of variables you can get the elements grouped by groups and by

the variables of each group.

The fields to choose belongs to the main table of the window. In any case, the main

table in turn depends on the layout, as in the “Files” window.

If a tree one level desired, the second field must be empty.

On each node appears the number of elements it has.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 10

Sort alphabetically

If not checked, it is sorted in descending order of elements forming each group or sub-

group. If checked, it is sorted in alphabetical order of the selected fields.

OK

By accepting all rows corresponding to the nodes marked in the dialog box are select-

ed. Then you can apply all the features of the selected set Presto.

Context menu options and “Edit”

Copy | Paste

It inserts into the active table the information in the clipboard.

If the information has been copied from an equivalent table in the same or other pro-

ject, is inserted on a new line at the cursor position.

If the information comes from another program such as a spreadsheet or a Word table,

or Presto, but the source and destination tables are not compatibles, the fields are

pasted from the field where the cursor is, as if the data were typed manually.

Hidden fields and inactive and the information is not supported, as the text in a numer-

ic field are ignored. Line breaks of the clipboard contents generate a new line and tabs

change of column.

When something is copied to the clipboard from another program, it has priority as previ-

ously copied from Presto. To avoid this, deselect or click on the upper left corner of the ta-

ble windows.

Cut

Delete the text of a field and copy it to the clipboard.

Delete

Select the desired line and press [Delete]. It removes the selected element and all asso-

ciated information.

• If you eliminate a concept of the last decomposition where is, it also eliminates

the concept.

• You cannot delete elements that have associated information affecting cost

control, as concepts with supplies or suppliers with documents.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 11

To eliminate Option

Complete tables “Project settings: Tables”, selecting the tables and deleting.

All texts “TOOLS: Working with Text”, “Delete” option.

Associated files “VIEW: Files”, select the files and delete.

Stages “VIEW: Activities and certifications” and clear the fields with

quantities.

Stages and activities “VIEW: Take-off lines”, select the take-off lines and delete.

Temporary planning Remove all precedencies.

Duplicate

Create an identical concept but with a different code, which includes most of the infor-

mation associated with the original, as the quantity and take-off lines, text and associ-

ated files.

This option appears in the “Code” windows budget, concepts, activities, organizations,

and management systems field.

Rename a concept

When you type or paste a non-existing code in the code of a concept, the concept is

renamed.

If the code already exists, the concept is replaced by the new, keeping the information

associated with the above concept, as the quantities.

Except in supplies windows, where the code change represents a change of provided con-

cept.

Undo | Redo

These options, accessible from the “EDITION” menu or its icon, allow unlimited editing

work done.

Undo

It cancels the operations performed by the user, in reverse order.

It ignores the actions that only affect the interface, such as open or close windows or

work environment, or undo the actions of other users working on the same project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 12

The text windows have undo and redo specific options.

Redo

Cancels the effect of immediately preceding undo operations.

Special undo

It displays the list of actions that can be undone or redone, with the number of opera-

tions in each transaction, time, date and current price of the estimate.

Double clicking on a line undo or redo all operations until it once.

Activate

The undo option can be disabled to speed up the work, for example, to perform time-

consuming operations.

If during the saving process of a project, “Cancel” is pressed on the part that keeps un-

do actions, this option is disabled.

Create snapshot

Enter a line in a list of undo to which you can easily return.

Copy

It copies the actions list to the clipboard for combining the different users and control

or audit the operations.

Reorder elements

Some windows as budget, you can reorder a dragging it to its new position within the

same window element. This way you can move a chapter, heading or staple to the de-

sired position.

The “Display order” dropdown list in the header indicates the display order of the tables

that have more than one key field, as the “Invoices” window.

Sort ascending | Sort descending

On a column header, order permanently the column elements.

These options are enabled in some columns, provided that the final table allows rear-

rangement.

Ascendant sorting on screen | Descending sorting in screen

They have the same effect as the previous, but it is temporary.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 13

Up | Down

Move the concept before or after the concept adjacent in the list. In the “Activities”

window, change the “Number” field.

Increase level | Demote

The concepts prices are always unitaries, without multiplying by the quantity. Accord-

ingly, in the work items and basic natures the price of certification, “Concepts.Cert”

matches the price of the estimate, “Concepts.Est”.

Move [F4]

It inserts in the cursor position concepts or take-off lines copied to the clipboard and

removes it from its previous position.

If there is nothing on the clipboard, Presto requests a mask, inserting in the cursor posi-

tion all the concepts that match and eliminating from its previous position concepts

that have only one superior.

Operate

It applies a predefined operations to a column or to a single column range.

Refer to “Expression builder”.

In operations that appears in the first line of the dialog box is enough to enter the de-

sired factor and press “Apply” and “Accept”.

In the alphanumeric fields, in addition to match them to a content, you can apply the

sum, which adds a text to the end, and the subtraction, which removes a text from posi-

tion where you are.

The generated result must be compatible with the field type and:

• While operating on calculated quantities, the elements from dependent are

eliminated, as take-off lines or stages.

• The concepts of percentage-type or not editable are not operated.

• Operating on calculated prices, the program asks if you want to block the price

or remove the decomposition.

Replace

This option searches a text and replaces it with the one.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 14

See what displayed on “Search”.

Find

Search for text in columns or selected range of cells, or column where the cursor is.

The option is disabled if there is a selected column whose content is a graphic, as if

nature or information fields.

Features (valid for filtering by words)

• To search in numeric or date fields, the value to find you have to write in its

format, i.e., with decimal separator, thousand separator and date separator.

• Words tilde is also looking as though they had none.

• The wildcard “*” at the end of each word is assumed. With the door text, text

“doors” are also looking for.

• It is not necessary that the words are complete; with door appears elements as

“door” and “doors”.

• You can put expressions in quotation marks, as “white gypsum” to search for

exact text.

• With the prefix “+” only elements with that word are looked for.

• With “-” prefix, items with this word are avoided.

The text to search can include the special characters:

Charac-

ter

Meaning

^p Paragraph break

^t Tab

^0nnn Any character, given by its ASCII code with three digits

The search text can be separated from surrounding text by blank spaces, punctuation,

tabs and carriage returns.

Search in all texts in the active window

This option can be turned into windows of type list, such as concepts, contracts, entities

or documents.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 15

If the cursor is in a subordinate window of text and this option is enabled, also searches

in the text of the concepts or documents visible in the main window.

Layouts

The table windows layouts are selected using the dropdown list to the left, and repre-

sent different ways of displaying the information in the table, including:

• The combination of visible and protected columns.

• The filter or mask applied to the elements of the table.

• The display order, if the window allows.

Customizing layouts

Layouts have options that allow you to customize the displayed information and adapt

to the customs of each user or organization, or adapted according to the geographical

area where they are used.

These options let you set the default content of the layouts, and sharing the definition

between different users.

Table windows have several layouts of user for each user design it according to their

preferences.

Save default schema

Once selected columns visible, protected or not, user columns and format multiple

fields if they are available, and the filter expression used, this option saves the settings

as standard schema or schema default.

By using “Restore layout” option, it recovers the corresponding saved definition.

Save layout in the works

It associates to the project root concept a file with the definition of the active layout.

The file name is generated with the same criteria as the “Export layout” option. This file

can be run by other users, changing the layouts of the windows for the file.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 16

Schema export

It generates a file with the extension “.PrestoLayout” which contains the definition of

the active layout. The file name is formed with the name of the main window, the name

of the subordinate window and the name of the exported layout and is in XML format.

Retrieve original schema

It replaces the default layout by the program original layout.

FILE: Import: layout layout

It imports a layouts definition file generated before, and replaces the contents of the

same exported layout, not on the layout where is imported.

If desired, the definition can be saved as a default layout.

FILE: Export: Default layouts

It generates a layouts definition file for each of the layouts of all program windows.

EDITION: Restore layout

Changes made by the user in each layout, except filters, remain until this option is used,

which recovers the default layout that be defined at the time.

Uploading configuration files of default layouts

1. Initialization

When starting Presto, takes the default configuration, and performs a sequential search

of configuration files that can exist in different directories.

If you find these files in any of the steps, the process terminates, and otherwise contin-

ue to the next step.

2. User files, in the configuration directory

(PrestoNNN.PrestoLayout)

The first time you boot Presto does not exist, and is created with the original values

once Presto closes.

On several occasions it boots Presto, it looks for this file.

If it exists, the default layout definitions are updated.

3. Administrator file, in the application directory

(Presto.PrestoLayout)

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 17

If it exists, the default layout definitions are updated.

4. Location file in the “Data” directory of each location

(Presto.PrestoLayout)

If it exists, the default layout definitions are updated.

Columns

The head of the numeric columns in a table may contain two types of values:

• The same value of the column, for the concept header.

• The sum of the column values, in brackets.

The track on the column header shows the table to which the field belongs, as should

be used in expressions or user reports as “Concepts.Description”.

Fit column width

This option appears in the “EDITION” menu, enable automatic adjustment of column

width to its content.

You can set a column width to another by clicking on the vertical line separating the

header of the column at the right. When setting a column automatic setting is disabled.

Freeze column | Mobilize column

It prevents the columns on the left of the window disappear when the other columns

move to the left.

Protect column | Unprotect column

Fields of a protected column, which appears in the softer color than non-editable col-

umns, can be edited if unprotected.

Choose visible columns

It lets modify the combination of visible columns, by a dialog box that shows the possi-

ble columns and selected.

To move columns from one side to another you can use the arrow or double-click on

its name. The “Up” and “Down” buttons change the position of the column.

In all layouts it’s possible choose several user columns that appears at the end of the

list of possible columns, and their properties are edited with contextual “Edit user col-

umn” option on the column header.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 18

User columns

The layouts have up to 16 columns that can be customized by the user, using global

expressions by column. The fields of the column are yellow background color because

they are not editable. To include an expression must use the appropriate options in the

context menu of the column header.

The process can be performed by one of the following modes:

• Inserting a user column via “Choose visible columns”, then editing its content

using “Edit user column”.

• In one step, using the “Insert Column user” option.

Insert user column

It lets inserting a column with the user-defined content. The column is inserted imme-

diately before the column where this option is pressed. It opens the Expression builder

dialog, where the user can select one of the existing in “Fields and expressions” or cre-

ate a new one.

Edit user column

It lets modify the content and format of the user columns. It activates only over the

column where the right mouse button is pressed, and allows you to set the following

properties:

Property Description Suggest

Name Unique name that identifies the expres-

sion.

List with the names of the

fields and available expres-

sions.

Origin Expression of Presto. Expression builder, with fields

and expressions available.

Help Descriptive text of the expression that

appears as track.

Format Appearance as the data type. Automatic

· Numeric

· Date

· Alphanumeric

Text color Text color for the field. Palette.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 19

Property Description Suggest

Background color Background color for the field. Palette.

The properties of a user column are the same regardless of where the layout is used,

and are different for each user and profile.

Name

Besides the names provided by the “Suggest” button, the user can directly enter the

name he want to assign to the expression, showing a warning if it already exists in the

list of fields and expressions.

Origin

Pressing the “Suggest” button, the available fields and expressions appear, and if any of

the expressions used in an user column, layouts where it is are displayed.

You can also create new expressions. Refer to “Expression builder: Fields and expres-

sions”.

Format

The properties are similar to those described for the text boxes of reports on “Design

report: VIEW: Properties”.

The differences are:

Type: Automatic

If the result of the expression is:

• Number: it applies the usual format for numeric fields.

• Text: left justified.

Type: Numeric

Header

It lets choosing the behaviour of the second line of the user column header:

• “Default”, try to execute the same expression for the superior element, if any,

and the estimate windows. It does not display values in hierarchical or list win-

dows.

• “Sum” shows the result of adding the contents of the visible cells of the column.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 20

Remove or create a field or expression

These operations are performed from the “Expressions builder”. When you select the

“Fields and expressions” element on the left frame, the names of the predefined or us-

er- created expressions appears.

Delete

To delete an expression, you must hide the column where it is being used in all layouts.

If the expression is in use in some layout, this option is disabled and displays the name

of the layout where is.

Save as

It let saving a new expression with the name indicated by the user, which facilitates its

identification in the list of “Fields and expressions” and in the layouts columns.

Columns multiple fields

These fields appear in the layouts that shows scheduled information for each concept,

such as quantities or amounts by stages or activities, contracts suppliers, or entities of

comparison of prices.

Are chosen in different form to other columns, and placed to the right of the layouts.

Columns of information fields: Info

Indicate the types of information items in the table.

Campo Icon It has Windows

Ia Associated files Documents Con-

cepts Diary

Id Vector drawings Concepts Diary

Ie Price. Not in “Info” Concepts

Ig It is supplier in any document Concepts

Ig Documents Diary

Ih Keywords. Not in “Info” Concepts

Ii

Images Concepts Diary

Ij It is a supply in any document Concepts

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 21

Campo Icon It has Windows

Il Precedences Relations

Im Take-off lines Relations

Ip Specifications Concepts Diary

Iq Records Diary

Ir Inferior concepts Concepts

Ir Resources Diary

Is Over one superior Concepts

It Text Documents Con-

cepts Diary

Iu

Stages Relations

Iv Maturities Documents, Diary

Inferior and more than one

superior. Only in the “Info”

field

Concepts

Documents equals Orders, Deliveries, Invoices

Some icons such as “Texts”, appear with grey background color when the information is

in one of their inferiors, bottomless when the information belongs to the active con-

cept, and half grey when the two situations.

For this information as text using the field indicated on the left, preceded by the char-

acter “%” and the name of the table. In the result, the letter refers to the concept and

the upper to the lower.

For example the expression which indicates the existence of associated files in a con-

cept is:

% Concepts.Ia

If the result is “aA”, both the concept and inferiors have associated files.

Concepts.Info

Indicates the types of information associated with the concept.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 22

Filter elements

The visible elements in a table can be chosen by different types of masks and filters,

which are chosen in the icon bar at the headwaters of the columns or the context menu

on the fields.

It can be activated a filter of each type, shown at the top of the window and whose ef-

fects are accumulated.

Unlike selection options, filters temporarily remove from visualization the elements that

do not match the condition.

In key fields

Mask

The masks are chosen in the “Mask” dropdown list and support the wildcards “?” and

“*”.

It applies only to the table key fields, usually the codes. If multiple key fields, such as

documents windows, is applied to the selected field for sorting it.

In other fields

Filter by content

It displays the lines with the same contents as the field on which the option, except in

numeric fields, showing the values within the range [ … | 0 to 1 | 1 to 10 | 10 to 100 |

100 to 1000 | … ].Negative numbers are grouped into a single range.

If a range of fields or rows are selected, items containing any of the values of the selec-

tion are displayed.

Filter by text color | background

Displays lines with the same text color or background in that field.

Joined filters

Add filter by content

Collect any active filter then filter by content.

In columns

The columns in which a filter for differences there on, show a header color different

from other columns.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 23

Filter by differences

Removes display items whose value is duplicated, except for numeric columns, hiding

the all range values minus one.

When placing the cursor on the filter field, a track shows the number of hidden items

with the same value as the field. After filtration column, can add a filter that collects

content from before.

Add filter by differences

After filtration column, add a filter for differences that accumulates the previous filter.

In selected rows

Filter By Selection

Once selected rows of the table, to apply the filter are displayed only those corre-

sponding to the selection.

Filter builder

Filter by expression

Show items that meet the condition or result of an expression of Presto.

It displays the dialog box of the expressions builder, with a quick help to define com-

parison filters between a field and a value:

Campo

It let choosing the field on which the filter will act in a list of fields in the active

window.

Operator

List the most common comparison operators.

Value

Field value to compare.

Clicking “Apply” is generated the necessary expression, that definitely applies pressing

“Accept”.

You can modify this expression, create other expressions or combine multiple filters

following the rules described in “Expressions builder”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 24

If mark “Filters” in the left window of the Expression builder you can use the predefined fil-

ters that appear in the right frame.

Word filter

Filters whose alphanumeric fields visible or not elements contain the right words, simi-

lar to that indicated in “use interface: Editing items: Search”.

Separator It equals to Example Filter elements containing

or door window “door” or ”window”

+ and +door +window “door” and “window”

- not +door -window “door”, but not “window”

In concepts windows are also looking at the keywords associated to the concept.

Including text window and attached files

Search in texts associated with the concept, both in the text window and associated text

files type.

Remove filters

Cancel all user filters and retrieves the default filter in the layout.

Filters can also cancel by closing the window or change the layout.

To cancel only the mask, enter “*” in the mask to apply to the layout.

Text windows

It let editing texts in the formats supported by Presto. The “Gallery” window has the

same behaviour when it contains a text.

The options allow you to add the most common format attributes. Other attributes,

such as tables, numbering, bullets and pictures, are also supported if the text comes

from other programs. The undo option in this window is only for changes in the text.

Non-Latin characters as Unicode text, can be used in text windows, but its format may be

altered by some tools Presto related texts.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 25

Translate

Translate the text to the specified language in “TOOLS: Translate text” options.

Export | Import

Export or import the text in RTF or TXT format.

Word wrap

It displays each paragraph on a single line of unlimited length.

Pass associated file

It converts the text in a file associated to concept, with the “TEX” aspect.

Create table

It creates a table in the text, with an optional header containing specific columns for

testing.

Check ortography

It checks the words in a dictionary, available for Castilian and Catalan as the project

language displayed on “VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous”.

Translate text

This option of the “TOOLS” menu takes the translation of the texts of the work to the

selected language. It also allows translate some Presto fields, depending on the select-

ed language.

You can use the services of Google for translation automatically to any of the support-

ed languages, keeping the format of faithful text to the original, with some exceptions,

such as managing the size of images and translation of texts with images.

Translation is better if the texts do not contain abbreviations or misprints.

If the translation process aborts, part of the project will remain untranslated, so it is

better not to save the changes and repeat the translation from the start.

User Dictionary

The translation generates by default a file “Dic.RTF” which is a dictionary with pairs of

messages, with the original text and its translation. This file is usually contained in Pres-

to configuration directory, but you can change its name and location.

The dictionary has the following advantages:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 26

• It avoids send to Google messages that have already been translated, saving

cost and time.

• It is an alternative for translations if you have not the translation service offered

by Google.

• You can change the translations, obtaining better results each time.

If red cells without content in the dictionary, future translations of the text are not per-

formed, so be deleted rows that are willing to translate, or even delete the file.

Google key for translation

The user must have an API key Google translation, and must accept the specifications

and conditions required by Google at any time.

First you must be registered on Google: https://accounts.google.com

The translation service is available at: https://code.google.com/apis/console

In “Services”, find “Translate API” and verify compliance with manufacturer’s require-

ments.

To get the key, go to “API Access” section “API key”.

Improve and customize Google translation

If you want to improve the translation by Google, you can create a dictionary that

changes the translation, replacing the keyword obtained by Google with another ap-

propriate to the local context.

Example:

estimate=Estimate

The dictionary is a text file called “fixtranslation.txt” and must appear in the configura-

tion directory of Presto.

Features:

• The conversion is case sensitive.

• It lets you writing comments in the text, after the character “;”

• In special characters precedes the character “\”

Working with Text

It lets standardize the format of all texts of the estimate or documents, or delete them.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 27

You can convert selected text to the same font type and color, convert case sensitive or

apply the same justification.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 28

Presto in the design stage In this manual the terms estimate and project are equivalent.

This chapter describes the processes usually performed by the editor of the project,

including, between others:

• Creating of the structure of estimate WBS.

• Product of each concept, inflation, currencies and other additional costs.

• Detailed measurements, activities and statements of approval.

• BIM link: Revit and Allplan integration.

• Further documentation of the work, construction agents and all kinds of files as-

sociated with concepts.

Estimate

An estimate is a tree which breaks down into smaller and simpler elements from the

chapters to the materials in a hierarchical structure of levels sometimes known as Work

Breakdown Structure, WBS.

Tree estimate

The estimate is created in “Tree” and “Estimate” windows and in the manual is usually

called the windows of the estimate.

Concepts

Each element of the structure of the estimate is a concept.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 29

The window “VIEW: Concepts” shows all concepts type price, ordered by their “Code”.

A concept may have lower concepts, forming decomposition. In turn, a concept may be

part of one or more higher concepts.

Concepts.Code

To register a concept you must enter a code in one of the windows of the estimate.

The suggest button, to the right of the field, proposes an automatic code.

When writing a code, if:

• Not found in the work, a new concept is created.

• Already contained elsewhere in the work, is also inserted under the new superi-

or concept.

• Derived from an existing parametric concept in the work, the concept derived

inserts.

.Unit

Unit of measure to which the unit price is concerned.

.Description

Brief descriptive text, complementary to general text.

This field supports multiple possibilities as:

• Change color via the context menu. Check “Presto in the design stage: Estimate:

States of approval”.

• Switch to uppercase, lowercase or fill from text. Refer to “Suggest” or “[F7]”.

• Translate to a language. Check “TOOLS: Translate text”.

• Improving its readability expanding their abbreviations, using wizards “Summary

type tasks del cuadro de precios IVE” or “Summary type tasks del cuadro de

precios Centro”.

.Est

Unit Price of the concept as contained in the project estimate. The unit price of the

higher concepts is the sum of the yields of lower concepts multiplied by the unit price.

There are other prices, which are described in other sections.

.Text

Unlimited text describing the concept. It’s introduced in the “Text” subordinate window.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 30

.NatC

In this field is the icon that represents the nature of the concept.

Al crear un concepto, el programa asigna automáticamente la naturaleza que corre-

sponde al código según las máscaras definidas por el usuario en "Project settings: Mis-

cellaneous", pero se puede cambiar posteriormente con el menú contextual sobre este

campo.

Type NatC Price concepts

Root Unique concept, superior to all.

Chapter Groups other concepts.

Chapters under other chapters are called “Sub-chapters”.

Work item Also called “Work items”, are the key elements of the estimate

that can be measured and certified.

Manpower

Material

Equipment

Others

Also called “natures” or “basic “.

If they have decomposition are called “Auxiliaries” but still have a

specific nature.

The background color code identifies the type of concept and is described in the “FILE:

Environment: Appearance”.

If you change the type of a concept that already contains information, such as convert-

ing a work item with take-off lines in a chapter, review the output, because although

not usually remove Presto data incompatible with the new situation, can change their

behaviour.

.Nat

This field represents the possible values of the nature of the concept, and its behaviour

varies depending on the site of use.

Use behaviour Example and

results

Column It displays the text of the nature. “Work item”

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 31

Numeric expression

Concepts.Nat == 5

It displays the numeric value of nature. The possi-

ble values are on track assignment options of

each nature.

1

Alphanumeric expres-

sion

Nature + ““ +%

Concepts.Nat

It displays the alphanumeric value of the nature if

preceded by “%”.

“Work item na-

ture”

El campo se puede usar en una expresión, filtro or columna de usuario

Approval status

Black | Green | Net | Grey

Contextual options are activated in the “Summary” field, and the results in color are

also seen in the same field.

Concepts.State

Their respective numerical value is 0, 3, 1 and 2.

.DataBlack | .DataGreen | .DateRed | .DateGrey

Changing the state, the concept updates the respective date.

Other fields of the concepts

Some of these fields are used especially in the project root concept, as indicated in

“Project information”. Others are free use or have specific behaviours for some program

options.

The list with all the concepts fields and of the other tables is contained in the expres-

sions builder or in the “REPORTS: Design report” window, in the “VIEW: Fields list” op-

tion, with the numerical values of the fields that correspond to types or statuses.

.Clase

Typology to which the nature of the concept belongs.

.Code2

Alternative concept code.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 32

.Origin

When creating a concept, the root source of the project is copied. This way you can

identify their origin but later copy to another projects.

.Description2

Complementary or alternative text to the description.

.UsrNum[n]

Free content numeric fields.

Other fields help to visualize the structure of the estimate

.EDT

Decimal code with the hierarchical position of the concept. It is visible in concepts with

a single superior.

.Level

Concept depth in the hierarchical structure. The level of the root concept is “0”.

.NumInf | .NumSup

Number of inferiors and superiors of the concept.

Prices and alternative units

It lets getting prices based in others inducers or other criteria, such as floor area, num-

ber of rooms or beds, etc.

.EstUnitAlt

This field allows you to display a second price of each concept in an alternative unit to

the main.

.UnitAlt

Unit of the alternative price.

.UnitAltFactor

Field where the conversion factor between the unit and the alternative unit is intro-

duced.

When you create a chapter, the default value of the conversion factor is the constructed

surface, taken from the general variable “SurfCons”. Thus, the chapters alternative price is

the price per square meter.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 33

Relations

Between each pair of upper and lower concepts there is a relationship, and is character-

ized because it is only in the work. The hierarchical structure of the estimate is formed

from these relationships.

The decomposition of a concept is given by the number of relationships in which figure

as superior.

Every relationship contains the data of the lower concept that is different in different

higher concepts. For example, the performance of a material in a work item or take-off

line of a work item in a chapter are properties of the relationship between the two.

The structure of relations is naturally seen in the “Tree” window. In the “Estimate” win-

dow, the inferior concept is in the central area of the window and the superior concept

in the header.

Relations.CodSup

Code of the superior concept of the relation.

.CodInf

Code of the inferior concept of the relation.

.Relation

Complete code of the relationship between the upper and lower concept.

.QtyEst

Quantity, yield or measurement of the concept by unit of the parent in the estimate. As

in prices, there are other quantities for certification, planning and execution, described

in other sections.

The take-off of a work item can be entered directly into this field or disaggregated by

take-off lines, as described in “Take-off lines”.

.AmntEst

Product of the quantity by the unit price of the inferior concept.

.Note

Specific text of the relationship of a concept with a top that appears in some fields as

track windows budget.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 34

.UsrNum

Numeric field of free content associated to the relation.

Calculation of prices and quantities

Presto automatically calculates the price and quantity of each concept when changes

the data that affect it.

These values can be associated with various methods of calculation.

Type and value

[*]

Method of calculation

Manual [0] Value not calculated, written by the user or process.

Calculated [3] Value calculated from other data.

Locked [1] Value written directly, different from that calculated.

“Lock” and “Unlock”

It’s not saved [2] Is calculated at each time depending on other values of

the estimate and is not saved with the project.

[*] Values of Concepts.TypeCalcul[1..5] field

To directly modify a price or a calculated quantity, the data those depends their calcu-

lations are deleted, such as the quantities or take-off lines of inferior concepts.

Prices and quantities cancelled

The cancelled fields are not calculating their superior concepts, and can be included or

removed at any time by “Set field as null” and “Set field as normal”.

The cancelled fields have the gray background.

Concepts.TypeNull[1..5]

It equals 1 if the price is cancelled.

Relations.TypeNull [1..5]

It equals 1 if the quantity on the price structure is void.

No modify the estimate

For not modifying the values of the take-off lines, performances and prices of the esti-

mate, the user can stop it. Refer to “FILE: Working environment: General: Block estimate

alteration”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 35

Calculation options

The following options allow you to set the level of automation of the calculations.

CALCULATIONS: Prices

It recalculates prices and quantities when are executed global operations, such as up-

dates, importing files, etc.

CALCULATIONS: Calculate all

It performs all calculations, including the results that are not part of the automatic cal-

culation. Run this option before considering a project as definitive to print or deliver it.

FILE: Working environment: General: Automatic price calculation

You can disable this option to speed up work on very large projects.

Operate with prices

“TOOLS” menu option that changes all the project prices or the inferiors to a chosen

concept applying a different factor to each nature.

Adjust price

“TOOLS” menu option that modify the yields or concepts prices to reach a fixed

amount of the project or chosen concept, or modify it in a percentage.

Blocked or percentage prices or cancelled prices or yields are unchanged.

The messages window shows the exact applied settings, which may be more than one.

Due to rounding, not always is possible reach an exact amount. The maximum setting

can be obtained by setting in the project settings rounding for display only.

Do not alter concepts which appear in further breakdowns

This option limits the adjustment to the concepts involved exclusively in their chosen

concept or lower, keeping the price of other concepts.

Fields related to the calculation

Concepts.Date

When you create a concept or modify its price, this field takes the general date of the

estimate, accessible “Project settings: Planning”. If the concept has children, price calcu-

lation assigns it the oldest date of all.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 36

Decomposition and adjustments in civil engineering

Prices can be adjusted by using separately or together other fields that can represent

production equipment, adjust the resource productivity or include losses of material

form.

The use of the following fields implies that performance may have other meanings con-

sistent with the given, such as the number of resources, percentage of dedication, etc.

use.

Relations.Factor

Coefficient of the relationship between two concepts, which operates on the amount as

follows:

• If the factor is positive, it multiplies.

• If the factor is negative, the divide. The inverse-factor value shown in the col-

umn of user “FactorInv”.

The factor used to adjust the performance of a concept without losing its original value,

allowing for example to add a percentage of losses to a material, consider the terrain

swelling or alter the productivity of a resource.

Concepts.Difficulty

Concept coefficient that operates the quantity or yield of their children of manpower or

equipment nature, and affects all pricing structures:

• If the difficulty is positive, it multiplies it.

• If the difficulty is negative, the divide, allowing production to represent the

team. The value of the inverse of the difficulty shown in user column “Difi-

cultadInv”.

Unlike factor is applied globally for each concept, and serves to adjust yields to the

particular conditions of execution, without affecting the material consumption.

Quantities and total amounts

These fields are calculated if the automatic pricing is enabled. Otherwise grayed.

Concepts.QtyTotEst

Total quantity of concept on estimate.

.TotEst

Concept total amount according to the estimate.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 37

Prices per natures

.MatEst | .ManpwrEst | .MaqEst | .OtrEst | .SubEst

Concept amount according to the estimate corresponding to each nature, calculated

from the inferior level.

If a supply concept is labelled, it is considered not decomposed. The items accumulate

in the “OtherEst” field, unless they are supplies that accumulate in “Sub”.

Fields indicated contain the values for the estimate. Qty be obtained for other pricing

structures, replacing the suffix “Est” for the corresponding.

Number of manpower or equipment for pricing structures

.QtyMdoEst | .QtyMdoCert | .QtyMdoTgt | .QtyMdoPlan | .QtyMdoReal

.QtyMdoEst | .QtyMdoCert | .QtyMdoTgt | .QtyMdoPlan | .QtyMdoReal

The fields contains the number of hours of manpower or equipment per unit of the

concept, calculated from inferiors whose units are hours.

To calculate the number of hours or amounts of manpower or equipment based on the

take-off of a work item, you can multiply one of these fields by the measurement, either

use predefined expressions available or create those wishing to:

hhEst | hhCert | hhTgt | hhPlan | hhReal

hmEst | hmCert | hmTgt | hmPlan | hmReal

Manpower or machinery hours of the concept in a relationship.

AmntMdoEst | AmntMdoCert | AmntMdoTgt | AmntMdoPlan | AmntMdoReal

AmntMachEst | AmntMachCert | AmntMachTgt | AmntMachPlan | AmntMachReal

Amount of manpower or equipment of the concept in a relationship.

Roundings

Project settings: Roundings

Rounding apply to all operations of official or administrative type, which are usually

tested by third parties, such as the estimate, certifications, invoicing documents, maturi-

ties and accounts with suppliers.

The results of operations are stored internally as accurately obtained, so that if subse-

quently the number of decimal places is increased, reappear with more accurate values.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 38

Internal or analytical use operations, as actual costs or sums by natures, are made with

the highest precision of the computer and the results are rounded only when viewing

or printing.

Rounding of quantities, as yields and take-off lines are defined depending on the na-

ture of the superior concept, so that all inferior concepts have the same number of dec-

imal places.

: Roundings for display only

Opera with all the significant figures and provides more accurate results. The number of

decimal values are used only for presentation.

: Rounding work items that act as auxiliary

They adapt the result to some particular requirements of price tables and administra-

tion departments.

Indirect costs

Presto takes into account the specifications of the Spanish LCSP, Law on Public Sector.

Indirect costs represent resources to be used to execute the project but are not part of

the estimate and therefore not invoiced in certifications, as the cost of the project man-

ager or the crane.

The sum of direct and indirect costs is called PEM, Material Estimate Execution. Presto

also uses the expression total cost.

In private project, the estimate is often seen as equivalent to PEM. The estimated final

prices, offered or awarded ones include the direct and indirect costs, but without ex-

plicitly disaggregation.

Percentages and results are in the dialog box “Project settings: Calculations”.

Automatic indirect cost

In public works, the regulation indicates a certain percentage for indirect costs, which is

common to all work items.

You can also enter the percentage manually, as the last element of each decomposi-

tion. However, the automatic indirect costs, in addition to its easy management, has

other advantages:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 39

• When copying concepts from a database price or from another project, assume

the percentage of indirect costs of the destination project.

• When a work item appears in the decomposition of another one, the indirect

cost is not doubled, as would occur if is an explicit part of the decomposition.

Presto applies the percentage of indirect costs indicated in the estimate amounts and

certification of certifiable concepts,i. .those as less of a chapter and are not chapters. No

indirect costs are applied to the prices of target and actual costs, but calculating the

amount of production.

Prices and amounts of chapters and their superior concepts include the total costs. At

inferior concepts, such as basic natures and the auxiliaries, the prices are only the direct

costs.

In all types of concepts, their unit costs broken down into direct and indirect costs are

in the fields:

Concepts.CosteDir [n]

Concepts.CosteInd [n]

Amounts are in the fields:

Relations.PrTot[n]

Relations.Ind[n]

Where n is 1 or 2, respectively, for the estimate and for certification.

In “Project settings: Rounding” it is possible specify whether you want the direct cost is

round or not before calculating the indirect cost.

When using automatic indirect costs is necessary to consider its effects by exchanging

estimates with other programs or formats like BC3 or Excel.

Project settings: Rounding: Do not apply rounding before calculating indirect costs 0:

Yes 1: No

It fits the computation to the demands of some government agencies.

Overhead, industrial profit and allocation coefficient

In “VIEW: Project settings”, the “Calculation” section has several fields which include

these values.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 40

The percentages and the results are used in reports and templates that generate the

summary sheet, and can be seen in the diagrams windows estimate, adding the “Rela-

tions.AmntEstAdj” column.

Prices and amounts of the concepts of the estimate not include any of the percentages

described below, to be applied only on the total amount of the PEM.

Project settings: Calculations: PerGeneralExpenses | PerIndustrialProfit

Percentages of overrun accordance with the rules for official work.

: EstTender

: EstAward

It lets the calculation of the low auction.

The value of these fields is entered manually or using the suggest button, that calcu-

lates the amount after applying the percentages of overrun to the current estimate of

the project.

The value does not change but later change the estimate.

: CoefAward

Also called low auction, is the low that is applied in the certification. The result is seen

in the reports of summary of certifications.

Suggest button provides the ratio of the above amounts.

Concepts of percentage type

Codes with “%” character in its code, with red background, representing a percentage

over the concepts that precede it in its breaking down and that meet the mask speci-

fied by the characters to the left of the character “%”.

The price of the concepts of percentage type contains the type in percentage, so each

different percentage requires a new concept. This percentage is always rounded to two

decimal places and is not affected by operating prices, adjust or alter the currencies.

The thus one is automatically calculated as the sum of the amounts divided by one

hundred, and displayed in the quantity field.

The percentage amount is the result of multiplying the much per one, contained in the

quantity, by the percentage that is in the price. The criteria for their calculation can be

modified:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 41

“VIEW: Project settings: Calculations”

Percentage applies only until former percentage

It lets setting the calculation basis only from the previous concept of percentage type. It

is incompatible with the BC3 format.

Round the base before calculating percentages

It lets round the calculation base to which the rate applies.

“VIEW: Project settings: Roundings”

Using concepts such percentage as accurately

It allows to calculate the amounts of the concepts of percentage type using all decimal

internally have in their field “Est”.

Organization of the estimate

In general, only those concepts should be organized in hierarchical order shown in the

figure and in the table at the beginning of the chapter.

To use the Presto resources is advisable to keep an orderly hierarchical structure:

• The concepts of type chapter and work must have an unique superior. Its quan-

tity is always the unity.

• A chapter can have lower mixtures directly as chapters and other concepts.

• The predefined reports, color codes and other program resources support up to

six levels of chapters.

Coding

We recommend using a consistent and uniform coding all projects. Chapters, if not

other criterion, use chapters with three-character codes of CENTRO database prices. In

work items is advisable to keep the original code database prices.

When printing, or before sending the project to third parties, they can automatically

replace the original codes by a decimal coding.

Project and reference

In general, a estimate is made copying existing concepts in other estimates or price

tables. To do this you can open several projects simultaneously.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 42

We call project to the active estimate at all times and reference to another open pro-

ject.

Copy of concepts from other projects

To insert a concept from another project, copy and paste or drag the concept between

the two projects. The concept is copied to the destination project with all its associated

information in the original project. If its currency is different from the currency of the

destination project, is treated as described in “Currencies”.

You can copy and paste or drag information between any compatible windows of the

opened projects. If the information is not homogeneous, a question of confirmation is

made.

Reduce levels

“TOOLS” menu option that eliminates concepts by levels or by types, simplifying the

estimate without affecting prices, whenever possible. For example, if there are concepts

of percentage type, it can affect the outcome because of its special method of calcula-

tion.

It should always select the concepts to which you want to apply the option, not their

superiors concepts.

Chapters (trades)

It removes the first level of chapters. If there not subchapters, the work items become

dependent root concept and its take-off lines are lost. The quantity is maintained, but

can change the rounding.

Subchapters

It removes all levels of subchapters and work items become dependent on the chap-

ters. If there are repeated work items are grouped in one, including its take-off lines, if

information is uniform. If not, as a work item with raised quantities in a chapter and

take-off lines in another, it’s grouped the quantity by the total, with disaggregating.

Refer to “TOOLS: Restructure take-off lines” for converting lump sums in take-off lines.

Work items

The work items that have decay are removed and the lower concepts become depend-

ent chapters, grouped if they are repeated.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 43

Auxiliaries

Inferior concepts affect the corresponding superior.

Restructure breakdown

“TOOLS” menu option that lets you alter the decomposition of a set of work items.

To operate exclusively with target decompositions use the options of the “PROCESSES”

menu.

Delete breakdown

It removes from the decomposition of the work items selected the concepts of the

marked natures.

If all natures are marked, the price of the work item is maintained.

Add to the breakdown

It inserts in the work items the concepts introduced in the list, which must already exist

in the project. If the proportions do not sum to 100, yields are calculated pro rata. The

original price of the work item is maintained, except for differences due to rounding or

when concepts type percentage are added.

Replace concepts

“TOOLS” menu option that replaces a concept by another in decompositions that ap-

pears, keeping your take-off lines, stages and quantities.

To replace a concept for another in a particular place, you can drag the new concept on

the former pressing the [Shift] key. The cursor takes the form of [x] and the concept is

replaced by the new, maintaining the properties associated with the relationship with

the superior, as the quantity and the take-off lines. This can be done between concepts

of different works.

To add or remove a concept in the decompositions of several concepts simultaneously,

add or delete these concepts in the “Superiors” window of the first.

Replace according to list

It lets making concepts substitutions in block, from a list of pairs of codes, original and

replacement ones, separated by a tab in a text file (.TXT).

The concepts that replace the originals cannot exist in the project. In this case, the data

of the concept will be empty, and must be completed or updated with those of another

project or table prices.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 44

Replacement instructions are executed in the order listed. You can use masks and un-

fold and delete codes.

Possibilities Original Replacement Result

Replace AB454 PC3465 AB454 is replaced by PC3465

mask * 1234* O* 1234HTJ is replaced by OHTJ

Mask? PQ?5 PTH?5 PQB5 is replaced by PTHB5

Split AB45 BH23

BH37

BH42

AB45 unfolds in BH23, BH37 and

BH42

Delete TY56 TY56 disappears of the decomposi-

tion

The percentages are

not duplicated

A1

A2

T1

%C

T2

%C

If A1 and A2 are in a same decompo-

sition, are replaced by T1, T2 and %C

(once)

Concept update

“TOOLS” menu option, replacing the information of the project concepts for which they

are in another project:

• The price table selected in the working environment.

• The first open reference.

• Another project to select.

Only the price of a concept is updated if not decomposition or if it changes because of

the update.

It takes into account the currency, if different between project and reference.

To update only the target decomposition use the appropriate option of the

“PROCESSES” menu.

Updating options

• The “Only non protected fields in active window” option allows selectively up-

date only the editable fields, in white. You can protect fields with “Protect col-

umn” option over the menu on the header.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 45

• The “Keep concept identification data” fields do not update the concept of BIM

models coming as “Code2”, “BIMGuid”, “BIMFamily” or “BIMType”.

• The “Add only (never delete)” option fills the empty fields only, but add selected

types of information.

Regroup chapters

Reorganizing the structure of the work with chapters and headings corresponding to

codes chapters chosen template works.

The classification process creates the necessary chapters according to the codes of the

existing items, move and order items to their corresponding chapters, and eliminates

any remaining chapters without content.

Several templates works with some examples for using this option is included, but you

can define your own templates to suit your requirements.

Inflation

Presto suggests the appropriate value to update prices between the date of origin of

each concept and the estimate date, and can selectively apply them.

Diary.Index

Monthly inflation indexes must be entered in this field from the window of dates. It

only uses the value of the months.

The index can be any base, since they apply in relative terms. If a month has not de-

fined the index, look for the previous month that does.

The book Excel “price revision index” has the inflation rate in the “DATA” tab, and you

can copy and paste in this field.

Concepts.IPC

Coefficient suggested to update the price of the concept; dependent on:

• The field “Date” of the concept itself.

• The date of the estimate, set to “Project settings: Planning”.

• The ratio between the “Index” field of two months, defined on the diary.

The suggest button on a budget or price target sample these prices with the coefficient

already applied, so it can be used directly to update the price of the concepts.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 46

Currencies

Presto lets you convert the prices of an estimate to another currency or to make esti-

mates with prices in multiple currencies and in the same project.

To manage prices conversion, is necessary to define the currencies used in the estimate,

choose the project currency, and the associate to the concepts their corresponding

currency.

Configuration of the currencies used in the estimate

Project settings: Currencies

It is a table where you can enter the specific currency for the project.

CurrISO

Acronyms ISO of currency.

: CurrName

Name of currency, used for example in the reports.

: CurrAcronym

Symbol or abbreviation of the currency.

: CurrExchgRate

Exchange rate between the currency and the currency of the work overall.

General currency of the project

Is the currency in which prices of concepts, except they have one in their own field

“Currency” are expressed.

You can select:

• “VIEW: Project settings”, under “Data”, “Currency” field.

• Campo “Concepts.Currency” the “Root” concept.

Calculation process

The concept price that has children concepts in different currencies are converted to its

own currency during the prices calculation, applying the corresponding parity.

When are imported concepts of a reference in a different currency:

• If the original currency of the concept is already in the table of the project of

destination, is transferred to the same price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 47

• If the currency is not on the table of the project of destination, is added to the

table, taking the parity from the original project.

• If the currencies table is full, it converts the price to the currency of the project

and a message is generated.

Concepts.Currency

Currency of the price of the concept. The suggest button displays the available in the

project.

.CurrExchgRate

Change the currency that appears in the project settings.

.SumPrec

Sum of the prices of the concepts associated to price assignment entities of type

“Price”, converted to the primary currency of the project.

Relations.AmntSumPrice

Amount obtained from the product of the “SumPrec” and “Relations.QtyEst” fields.

Converting the prices from one estimate to another currency

If the currency of the work is modified, and both the old currency and the new are in

the table currency will be converted to the new currency prices of all concepts that do

not have a specific currency.

Estimate normalized in various currencies to the currency of the work

Each concept has its price and its corresponding currency. The results are becoming or

normalizing to the currency of the parent concept, until the “Root” concept or the pro-

ject.

Estimate in multiple currencies with separate amounts

This system requires:

• Estimate containing basic concepts (materials, manpower, equipment, etc.), or

work items without breakdown.

• Entities of type “Price” representing each of the currencies involved.

• The use of estimate windows, “Estimate by currencies” layout.

Each basic concept has a field that corresponds to any of the entities or currencies,

where its price is introduced. The amounts are accumulated at the superior concept

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 48

without making any conversion, until the root concept or the project, where the esti-

mate amounts in each of the currencies involved are seen.

A plugin makes automatically and in both directions, the adaptation of a standardized

estimate in another with independent currencies.

Results of managing estimates in multiple currencies

Estimate in multiple currencies

Parametric concepts

Parametric concepts, with the bottom of the code in orange, containing several ques-

tions.

By selecting the answers in the “Parametric” window creates a derivative concept, with

its text, breakdown and price. To copy to the project, use “Copy” icon and paste it into

the appropriate destination.

To use some bases of parametric prices, as the ITEC, it is necessary previously selecting

the parameters of a global parametric concept associated to the project root concept.

Regenerate

Option “TOOLS: Parametric” menu that regenerates budget concepts derived from par-

ametric concepts.

Parametric regenerating can be in the same work, or reference.

When you import a BC3 file, this option runs automatically if exist parametric concepts

containing other parametric concepts, except that they are compiled.

Create parametric concepts

The user can create his own parametric concepts following the rules established for its

creation.

Specific tools for generating, testing and development, and are described in “Service

request” web of Presto, section “estimates: Working with price tables.”

Tests and checks

Presto offers many possibilities for testing the estimate prior to print or generate.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 49

Cross-check two projects

“TOOLS” menu option that detects differences or similarities between the active project

and another.

The results of the comparison can be sent to Excel or mark in active project, changing

the color of the description.

Price concepts

This option compares only the information of concepts, regardless of the budget struc-

ture. It is useful to find differences between the prices of the work and a price table.

Other options also taken into account the structure of the estimate, i.e., the lower con-

cepts and their order.

Mark previously all concepts in black

It removes previously all colors of the description.

Mark differences in red

Make the descriptions of concepts where there are differences.

Mark matches in green

It assigns the descriptions of concepts where matches. It lets validating the concepts of

a project respect of several price tables, using the option successively.

Export to Excel

If in the decomposition of the reference the concept is in another position, the code in

the project is red (differences only) or black (matches only).

Are not taken in account the concepts of the reference that are not in the project. To

detect them, do the reverse comparison.

Comparing the texts are exported:

• 256 characters if the concept does not exist in the reference.

• The texts to the first difference, plus 10 characters.

• 9 characters, if the texts match.

Categorization

The category is selected in a dropdown list, which can be seen in the estimate windows,

“Help for measurement” layout.

A wizard does this automatically, depending on the source and nature of the concept.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 50

Then the utility that can be applied depending on the nature and category assigned is

displayed:

Campo Nature Utility Criteria

Root Calculate the work term in

months, depending on the esti-

mate amount.

RD 1020/1993

Constructive Typology, by

uses.

CatSyst Chapter Estimates by subsystems, indirect

costs.

CTE systems.

CatFunc Work item Checking of surface measure-

ments.

Functional units

CatMat Material Quality Control Plan.

Study of waste management.

Type tests.

LER residue code.

CatCol All Differentiating by color.

Fields of “concepts” table

Checking surfaces

On a estimate, areas of the different layers of the items representing surface elements

must be related to measures of other units and the dimensions of the building.

Each functional element, such as the ground or facade can be assigned up to four lay-

ers combined:

Category Example

Functional element Facade

1: Home Walls

2: Auxiliary Isolation, permeabilization

3: Coating Plastering, tiling

4: Finishing Painting

Some work items that represent surfaces, but are measured per unit, as the carpentries,

the wizard can deduce the dimensions from the text contained in the description,

where explicit. Thus, fills “m2” as an alternative unit in the “UnitAlt” field and the surface

in the “UnitAltFactor” conversion factor.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 51

Concepts.Category

The internal value of the category is obtained by adding the number of the row and the

header; for example, the pitching is “0.122.0.0”.

Internally, the field contains an IP address number, with four groups of values separated

by a dot:

Chapter.WorkItem.Material.Color

It can be assign to each group its own category, regardless of the type of concept that

is. The new concepts take the categories of the superiors.

Surface analysis by categories

This report of “01 Estimates and take-off lines” group, shows grouped the similar cate-

gories, so that they can easily recognize discrepancies and errors.

Results of the estimate

The documents required to present the estimate are obtained with reports and tem-

plates, which can be printed on paper, exported as PDF, or RTF format for later editing.

Reports of the group “01 Estimate and take-off lines”:

Estimate and take-off lines

Document with all the necessary information for printing the estimate, with or without

text, take-off lines or prices.

Summary of the estimate

Report printed or Excel workbook with the list of chapters, with percentages of cost

overrun and signatures.

The obtention of the summary sheet requires that the project identification data be enlist-

ed and the “Developer” and “Proyectist” entities, as described in “Project information”.

Database prices 1 and 2

Document for administration, with the texts of the work items and their unitary prices in

letter (prices table number 1) or its decomposition by natures (prices table number 2).

Database prices 1 and 2 by chapters

Similar to previous, showing the work items grouped in its corresponding chapter.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 52

Table of decomposed

It prints work items, choosing selectively the properties and the desired format of the

decomposition.

Table of broken down by chapters

Similar to previous, showing the work items grouped in its corresponding chapter.

Database prices disaggregated by natures

Prices table in which each work item is broken down by each of the natures that built it,

showing the yield and price of each.

If there is any auxiliary work item, is considered material.

Total quantities required by work items

It displays the work item and their decomposed. For each of them, it shows the quantity

of the decomposed required for making the work item take-off lines.

Auxiliary concepts

List of basic concepts with decomposition.

Basics

List of concepts by basic natures, which generates reports of materials, manpower and

equipment.

You can include the total quantities and prices.

Partial estimate

Partial estimates are considered the work items that have, as inferior concepts, some

work items with take-off lines.

Work items

List of work items ordered by any criteria you choose.

It has two separators that indicate 20% and 80 % of the amount of the project, allowing

you to quickly identify work items with more impact on the estimate.

Estimate with decomposed and measurements

Similar to the report of estimate and take-off lines; it adds the decomposition of the

work item, and change the format of the header of the take-off lines.

Texts, graphics and specifications

It displays graphical information and the texts of the project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 53

Stages and activities

This chapter describes the breakdown of the number of work items for its later tracking:

• Take-off lines.

• Activities in measuring lines.

• Components of the take-off lines.

• Advanced tools for reorganization of take-off lines.

• Import and check take-off lines .

Take-off lines and concept of activity

The take-off lines are associated with activities through the dropdown field “Activity”.

The text in the list of activities is contained in the “Description” field of activity, and can

be changed by accessing the “Activities” window.

Meaning of activity

An activity may represent a different criteria that allows grouping the results obtained

from the take-off lines, alternative to the estimate structure:

• Areas, plants or portions of the project.

• Stages of execution.

• Tasks functional groups or construction processes.

Each take-off line of a work item is associated to an activity, which allows to obtain a

matrix structure of both.

Description Quantity Act1 Act2 Act3 Act4 Act5

Work item 5.620 300 600 1.500 120 3.100

Take-off lines by activity

Act1 100

Act1 200

Act2 100

Act2 500

Act3 800

Act3 700

Act4 50

Act4 70

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 54

Description Quantity Act1 Act2 Act3 Act4 Act5

Act5 1.300

Act5 1.800

Similarly, the amounts for each activity of each work item involved in each activity are

calculated.

Create, edit and view activities

The activities are managed in the “VIEW: Activities” window, where you can create and

edit, and generally behave like any other item.

You can also create in the estimate windows, allocating the “Activity” nature, and in the

take-off lines.

This window has similar layouts and multiple fields to the estimate window, as several

subordinate windows:

• Text and “Thumbnail”, with the same functionality as indicated for concepts.

• “Work items”, to display the work items with take-off lines associated to each

activity and its corresponding quantity.

• “Resources “, to display the resources needed to perform the activity. These re-

sources must first be calculated using the “PROCESS: Calculate resources” op-

tion.

• “Children”, to display the activity optional breakdown.

Uses and possibilities

Like any concept, an activity can be part of the decomposition of a chapter, or can be

decomposed into other concepts.

For example, you can copy a group of activities and paste them in the decomposition

of a chapter. This structure allows the distribution of activities in the Gantt chart, de-

scribed in “Temporary Planning”.

Effects to consider this organization:

• The quantity of the activity is the unity, as in the chapters.

• To not duplicate the project amounts, should be properly annulated the quanti-

ties or prices of the estimate structure chapters or from activities.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 55

• If in the decomposition of a chapter activities and work items are mixed, the re-

sult by stages in the chapter cannot be uniform. It prevails in this case the calcu-

lations obtained from the activities.

Fields

Activities.Number

Activity number; is independent of the code. Never change even change of type or

code.

In the window of activities, appear sorted by this field, but you can change the order

with icons “Up” and “Down”.

.Code | .Description

Equivalent to the same fields of “concepts” table.

.Color

Color assigned to each activity, visible in the diagram bars. By suppressing the field

recovers the default color.

.Space

It is the location where the activity is executed, and automatically fills in the process of

creating activities division, described in “Plan-It”.

Create and modify take-off lines

In general, you can only enter take-off lines in relations where the superior concept is a

chapter and the inferior is a work item.

If the superior concept is another work item, you can enter take-off lines to create partial

estimates or break down a yield, but cannot be associated to stages, as indicated in “The

certification”.

A work item can appear in different chapters with different take-off lines.

Insert and delete take-off lines

If you register a take-off line some previously entered values are repeated. These values

are included in the header of each column, and it happens for example with the “Activi-

ty”, “StateEst”, “Area”, “Plant”, “Orientation” fields, stage number, etc ...

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 56

When copying existing lines activity is not altered, but takes into account the above

behaviors. Therefore, before adding or copy measurements, make sure the most ap-

propriate layout to the desired result.

Similarly, while deleting a take-off line only the fields that are visible are deleted. The

line only disappears completely if not contained in any stage.

If the “Element” line field has a content, or terms associated parameters are also delet-

ed.

Take-offs edition

For example, to repeat the value of a cell in a column, simply copy the value, select the

desired range and paste.

Presto specific options, accessible via the context menu, add other possibilities such as:

• Operate the selected fields using an expression.

• Copy the top field [F9 ].

• Copy field on the left [Shift + F9].

• Use the suggest button, that shows the most commonly used values in the up-

per rows, and their variants [F7] and [Shift + F7].

• Sort and filter by various criteria.

You can also select and drag lines to change their order, as in the rest of the program.

Fields of take-off lines

TakeOff.Est

It is a flag that indicates whether the take-off line is included or not in the estimate and

not affect to the rest of pricing structures.

They are not included in the budget lines whose approval status is “pending changes”

or not assigned any “activity”.

Relating to activities

.Activity

The association of activities to the take-off lines lets:

• Analyse the draft Alternatively, as described in “Presto in the design stage: Take-

off lines: Take-off lines and concept of activity”.

• Get automatic subtotals.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 57

• Match the take-off lines from one work item to partial measurement of another.

You can create activities directly in the dropdown list, selecting the next available num-

ber, which appears with the sign “+”.

The take-off lines without activity not belong to any pricing structure.

The amounts of the activities are calculated in “CALCULATIONS: Take-off lines” and can

obtain the values of all fields that depend on the allocation of the take-off lines to es-

timate status and to planning, certification and execution stages.

Relating to the dimensions and rounding

Concepts.RedParc

Number of decimals used in the rounding of fields dimensions, quantities and subto-

tals. The total sum for the work item is rounded to the number for quantities of work

items.

Each work item can have a specific rounding in their take-off lines, which is introduced

in this field in the concepts of work item nature.

This field can be found in the window of concepts, “Work items: Take-off lines” layout,

or may be included in any layout of the estimate windows.

Take-offLines.N | .Length | .Width | .Height

The “N” column does not round decimals or apply thousand separators.

Cancel | Uncancel

It lets respectively include or not the value of a dimension or formula in calculating the

quantity of the take-off line.

cancelled dimensions have grey background, and generally treated as if its contents

were nothing.

.NulN | .NulLength | .NulWidth | .NulHeight

These fields have value 1 if the corresponding dimension is cancelled.

.Quantity

It is the product of the four columns of dimensions other than zero, except when take-

off lines formulas were used.

Instead of using dimensions, you can write directly a total quantity, which will appear in

black color.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 58

.Perimeter | .Surface | .Volume

Resulting values for different measurement units. Usually come from BIM models and

allow the user to select the most appropriate to your measurement criterion value.

Other values

.UsrNum

User numerical value associated to the take-off line.

.Date

Date and time of the work session, which corresponds to the opening of the project.

Subtotals and sums

You can create intermediate take-off lines to see subtotals, with the sum of the quanti-

ties in the lines from the subtotal immediate last.

.QtyEst

The values of subtotals are in the field or its equivalent in other pricing structures, as

they may be different in each.

The grey background color indicates that it is not included in the estimate.

.Type

Equals 1 if the take-off line is a subtotal.

.OrQtyEst

This field, and their equivalents in other pricing structures, contain the sum of all the

lines, to source.

Project settings: Calculation: Automatic subtotals in take-off lines

It generates an automatic subtotal after each group of take-off lines with the same ac-

tivity and approval status. Also assigns a subtotal to the last take-off line. This option:

• It removes all existing manual subtotals.

• Disable options Regular and Interval subtotal.

Interval subtotal

On a take-off line, the line becomes a subtotal.

Regular

It converts a subtotal line in a normal take-off line.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 59

Split

Create a line measurement from the line to split, and asks the number and dimension

to transfer to the new line:

• If the line has not dimension, it duplicates the original.

• If it has any dimension, asks the quantity to unfold in the following order: N,

Length, Width, Height, Qty.

The “N” field is not taken into account if it is either 0 or 1.

Take-off lines fields concerning identification

.Relation | .CodSup | .CodInf

Relationship between two concepts, top and bottom, to which the measurement line

belongs.

.Comentary

It includes additional information measuring line, and can be seen in different colors if

defined in “Color” field.

.Note

User text associated with the measuring line that appears as a clue in some fields of

measurements.

.File | .Layer | .FromZone | .Zone | .Plant | .Area

Additional fields that can come from drawing programs or BIM models.

The “FromZone” field is filled with “In room” parameter of the model.

.Orientation

List with the cardinal points representing the orientation of the wall.

.Level

Terrain-level of the element.

.X | .Y | .Z

Coordinates of the element insertion point.

.GridX | .GridY

Identifiers respectively horizontal and vertical grid closest to the element in the model.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 60

.Color

It affects the commentary color and has the same color list of AutoCAD.

.Division

Space, floor, local, area, kilometre or other subdivision, used to create broken down by

field activities. It can be filled manually or with data from other fields of measurements.

.Element

Take-off lines identifier used by different connections BIM, which facilitates the location

in the model.

.ElementSup

Identifier element that contains another element in the measurement line.

.Guid

Unique identifier of the take-off line generated by Presto. In some cases it copies from

the “BIMGuid” field.

.BIMGuid

Unique identifier of the measurement in IFC format, used for some connections with

BIM models.

.BIMCode

Original code of the work item of origin of the line.

.FamilyBIM

Family name in the model.

.TypeBIM

Name Type in the model.

.Workset

Workset element in the BIM model.

.Mark

Identifier different objects of the same type.

It is filled:

• With the content from a BIM model.

• By creating a take-off line.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 61

• With “Suggest” button.

• To check the integrity of the project.

• By unfolding take-off lines.

.Option

Design options.

.Variante

Alternative to a design choice.

.Origin

Origin of the take-off line, and you can choose through a list. Each element corre-

sponds to a numeric value that can be used in expressions.

Value Origin

1 Presto

2 DWG

3 Take-offs wizards

5 Allplan

8 Revit

9 BC3

10 Primavera

Sources of take-off lines

Take-off expressions

When the elements to be measured are not orthogonal prism, is easier to introduce

into the take-off lines other geometric dimensions. For example, the measurement of

rounds of steel is more legible when the diameter in millimeters is introduced instead

of the section in square meters.

Take-off line formula

This option lets you assign predefined selected lines, which can be edited in “FILE:

Working environment: Formulas” formulas.

.Formula

The expression is written in this field and may contain:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 62

• The “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” letters (in upper or lower case) to refer to column “N”,

“Length”, “Width” and “Height” respectively. Columns that do not explicitly ap-

pear in the expression act normally, multiplying the result.

• Numbers, using the dot to separate the decimal part.

• The four arithmetic operators.

• The exponentiation "^".

• The letter “P” as equivalent of pi.

The following functions are also supported:

Function Result

ABS (x) Absolute value.

SQRT (x) Square root.

SIN (º) COS (º) TAN (º) Trigonometric function of the angle, in degrees intro-

duced.

IPE (C) · IPN (C) · UPN (C)

HEA (C) · HEB (C) · HEM (C)

Profile cm2 section of each series in the syllabus of

“Arcelor”, with its hedge in mm in the column C.

L (C, D) Idem, in function of wing and thickness.

REBAR (C) Weight of a steel rod with diameter in mm in column C.

In the example of the steel bars, the appropriate expression to introduce the diameter

in millimetres in the “Width” column is:

(C^2/100)/4*P*0.785

In the “Formula” field you can enter measurements with arithmetic expressions without

using dimensional fields, such as:

(70*12.5)-3*10*10

Examples of formulas applicable to take-off lines

Comment N

A

Length

B

Width

C

Height

D

Formula

Triangle N Base Height Espesor 0.5

Trapeze N Base1 Base2 Height (B+C)/2

Circle N ø Height B^2*P/4

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 63

Comment N

A

Length

B

Width

C

Height

D

Formula

Circumference N ø Height P

Earthworks d = 20 m (*) N Area1 Area2 (B+C)/2*20

Earthworks d <> 20 m (

*)

N Area1 Area2 Distancia (B+C)/2

Ditch between sections

of 20 m

Em

ban

km

ent

Base Cota

red1

Cota

roja2

(B* (C+D) +

(C^2+D^2)/A)*10

Armor N Length ø mm REBAR(C)

Metal profile N Length Area cm2 0.785

(*) d=distance

The REBAR formula corresponds to steel reinforcements.

In profile in “L”, it is considered that the wings are the same size “H”.

Results of take-off lines with formulas:

N

A

Length

B

Width

C

Height

D

Formula

Quantity

1 5,00 2,00 3,00 A * (B / C) * D 7,50

1 5,00 2,00 3,00 (B / C) 7,50

1 5,00 2,00 3,00 4 120,00

1 5,00 2,00 3,00 5-3 60,00

1 3 + (5 + 4.5 + 0.5) * 2 23,00

1 5,00 240,00 IPE (C) 195,50

Measurement formulas associated to the concept

Concepts.Formula

This field allows you to associate a default formula to the concept, which will apply to

new take-off lines that are created associated to itself. It also automatically associates a

formula to the concept if is associated manually to all their take-off lines.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 64

In any case, the active formula is contained in the take-off line, which may be different

from the overall formula of the concept.

.TexComment | .TexN | .TexLength | .TexWidth | .TexHeight

The headers of these columns of take-off lines can be customized for each concept

using these fields.

These headers provide guidance to fill them when they have associated formulas and

are printed in reports of take-off lines.

Measuring by approval statuses

To get the necessary information when additions or modifications on the project, must

be entered as take-off lines and associate to an estimate approval status.

The approval status is selected with the drop-down list next field.

TakeOff.StateEst

Field that contains the status of the take-off line.

StateEst Value Suffix Approval status

Initial estimate 0 Ini Initial project estimate.

Approved change 2 Mod Modified, amended or approved changes.

Pending change 1 Pend Estimate pending of approval. No addition to

the estimate.

The manual will refer to these states either by name or color. The suffixes in this table

are used in many Presto fields and tables, so it should be taken into account unless

otherwise indicated.

Results by activities

In estimate windows and layouts

You can see the overall results of each work item and chapters to which they belong.

The take-off lines of each work item are in the “Take-off lines” subordinate window.

As the measurements are associated with one or more activities, you can view the re-

sults of each activity for each work item and chapter in the “Activities” subordinate win-

dow. These results can also be seen in the multiple fields of the estimate windows, indi-

cating the initial number of the activity you want to view.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 65

In the “Activities” window

You can see the results of the estimate for each activity, and its breakdown by natures.

In “Work items” subordinate window, work items containing take-off lines of activity,

and the quantity that is involved. Double-clicking locates the work item as an active

concept in the estimate windows.

In the “Take-off lines” subordinate window include take-off lines assigned to each activ-

ity.

Reports of the group “01 Estimate and take-off lines”

Activities by work items

It is a estimate by chapters and work items whose quantities are broken down by activi-

ties that are associated with take-off lines.

Basics concepts for activities

Activities with their work items, and resources or basic concepts needed.

Take-off lines by activity

Activities with their work items, and take-off lines associated with both.

Estimate and take-offs by activities

It’s a traditional variant of estimate, in which the take-off lines are sorted by activity,

regardless of its order within the take-off lines of each work item.

Measuring transfer

The task of measuring a project greatly is faster if the measurements of some key ele-

ments are reused to generate others. This occurs, for example, if the coatings are gen-

erated based on the measurements of the enclosures.

Presto allows you to insert in a take-off line a reference to the results of other take-off

lines of the estimate, which will be automatically updated if they change.

Measurements of other pricing structures are not taken into account.

Link to work item

The option is also available with the suggest button in the “Formula” field, and displays

a dialog box with two types of information:

• The structure of chapters and work items with a breakdown by activities.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 66

• Quantities for the selected work item or activity.

Quantity Formula

Total quantity =CodSup/CodInf

Quantity in one of their activities =CodSup/CodInf/Code de la ac-

tividad

Sum of values in a column =CodSup / CodInf.SumaDimensión

*

Most repeated value in a column or

mode

=CodSup / CodInf.ModaDimensión

*

Perimeter in plant =CodSup/CodInf.PeriHor

Perimeter of the front face =CodSup/CodInf.PeriVert

Perimeter of the side face =CodSup/CodInf.PeriHor

Horizontal surface =CodSup/CodInf.SurfHor

Surface of the front face =CodSup/CodInf.SurfVert

Surface of the side wall =CodSup/CodInf.SurfSide

Volumen =CodSup/CodInf.Volumen

Sum of negative lines =CodSup/CodInf.Discount

* “Dimension” can be “Length”, “Width” or “Height”.

Check the consistency of the results:

1. When void dimensions are used, because they are taken in account.

2. When copying and pasting take-off lines between different works, because the activities

of both works cannot match. If the activity does not exist in the work of destination indi-

cated in the formula by “<Act??>“.

The mode, or more repeated value, lets identify the height of the partitions, regardless

of isolated sections of another height.

The sum of lengths allows obtain the sockets from the measuring of the partitions.

The sum of horizontal surfaces lets to calculate the cleaning concrete of foundation

from the volume take-off.

These values also lets quick check the take-off lines, and can be seen for all work items

in “Help for measurement” layout of the estimate windows.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 67

Reference fields from take-off lines

Relations.SumN | SumLenght | . SumWidth | .SumHeight

Sum of the values in each column of the take-off lines.

Relations.ModeN | .ModeLenght | .ModaWidth | .ModeHeigth

Most repeated value of each column of the take-off line.

.PeriHor

Summation of (Length * 2 + Width * 2) of the take-off lines.

.PeriVert

Summation of (length * 2 + height * 2) of the measurement.

.SurfHor

Sum of (Length * Width) of the take-off line.

.SurfVert

Sum of (Length * Height) of the measurement.

.SurfSide

Sum of (Width * Height) of the take-off line.

.Volumen

Sum of products of all dimensions of the take-off lines.

.Discount

Sum of quantities of all negative take-off lines.

Go to reference

It is situated in the work item corresponding to the source of the reference.

See the references of a project

In “VIEW: Take-off lines”, “Take-off lines references” layout, are all cross-reference be-

tween work items.

References.Destination

Ratio of the take-off line which contains a reference to the take-off line of another work

item.

.Origin

Relationship of the referenced work item from the “Formula” field of a take-off line.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 68

.Activity

Identification of the activity of the referenced work item.

Restructure take-off lines

“TOOLS” menu option that lets doing automatic operations to create, copy and merge

take-off lines.

Replace references for take-off lines

This option replaces the measurement line that contains the reference for all the refer-

enced lines, so that the overall result of the calculation remains unchanged.

It is necessary to print the measurements with all its detail, or perform other operations

certification and monitoring, which are different in the work item of origin and the des-

tination.

This option is accessible in the context menu of the windows of measurements.

Convert lump quantities into take-off lines

It creates the take-off lines of the selected work items that be necessaries to reflect the

quantities entered directly into the work item or in stages, which become calculated

(magenta).

It lets continue in form disaggregated the work started with lump sums.

Consolidate take-off lines

Several options allow recast take-off lines that are equal or similar. If not items selected,

applies to all.

These options are also accessible from the context menu of the take-off windows. In

this case the selection is made with take-off lines to consolidate.

Some fields of the take-off table are not taken into account when comparing lines will

be consolidated: “Guid”, “BIMGuid”, “Item”, “Date”, “Source”, “Type”, “Id”.

Consolidate equal lines

Merges into a line of take-off lines identical except the “N” field. The “N” field is the

sum of the consolidated “N”.

If the line contains a formula that applies to the field “N” an operation without the dis-

tributive property, the result of the consolidation will be inaccurate. For example:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 69

N Length Width Height Formula Quantity

Line 1 2 3,00 4,00 5,00 (A+B)*(C+D) 45,00

Line 2 3 3,00 4,00 5,00 (A+B)*(C+D) 54,00

Result 5 3,00 4,00 5,00 (A+B)*(C+D) 72,00

Correct score: 99.00

Consolidate similar lines

In this case, the lines can have a different dimension. Replaced by a line where “N” is

the unity and the field with different dimension contains the sum of the products of the

“N” field and the different dimension for consolidated.

No lines having formulas are consolidated, because the described in the previous option

can be applied to any columns.

Consolidate lines by stages

It groups lines of equal measurement, but belong to different price structures. For ex-

ample, recasts two equal lines that are separately in the estimate and in a phase of cer-

tification.

Edit or delete take-off lines in all the project

In the “VIEW: Take-off lines” are all take-off lines of the work, and it can modify or de-

lete dimensions, change of activity or status, or even eliminate all take-off lines.

You can also delete all take-off lines on “VIEW: Project settings: Tables”, option, elimi-

nating “Take-off lines” table.

Find the work item to which a take-off line is

Choice of the main windows “Measurements” and “Temporary Measures”:

Go to work item

It stands as active heading to which the concept belongs measurement line, making its

location in the windows budget.

A double click on a line measuring the same effect.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 70

Take-off lines importation

Importing measurements inserted into the current, or destination, take-off lines coming

from another work, the work of origin or reference work.

This option allows you to import, among other possibilities:

• Measurements that come from Cost-It, Revit Plug for Presto.

• BC3 files, XCA or any other, previously imported to a new work.

• Changes to the estimate or planning made on a copy of the work.

• Certifications current estimate, introduced in a copy of the work.

As always measurements are imported from another work, in this intermediate can

work out the checks and modifications as are appropriate before making the transfer to

the current work.

The import is run from “FILE: Import: Measurements” or the “Import” window “VIEW:

Temp take-off lines” icon. In this window all the required checks and final transfer to

the work performed.

While importing take-off lines, existing temporary take-off lines are erased, and during

import:

• Are not taken into account the lines without associated activity, and not part of

the estimate.

• In lines that contain references to other measurements it is checked whether the

number is still correct. If not, the total is kept, but the dimensions and cancel

reference.

Imported lines can be inserted directly in the work or previously existing compare to

detect changes and combining new information with existing, as indicated below.

The “Transfer” icon inserts into the work the selected lines or all, if not selection, and

removed from the temporal window and table. The lines not transferred remains in the

work.

Comparison

The “Only lines of the same origin” allows checking only between the lines that have

the same content in the “Origin”. This option allows updating the take-off lines come

from a specific source without disturbing the rest of the information entered by the

user.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 71

The fields in the window are generally the same as measuring lines contain duplicates

to display the value on the existing line and the new, in this case, the “Org” prefix.

The layouts allow you to display the information available in each case, including the

amount involved in each change in each pricing structure, contained in the “VarEst”,

“VarCert”, “VarPlan” etc. fields.

For “New work items” layout is not necessary to previously perform the check.

If the take-off lines of the reference contain elements from Revit, the option can be

used “Select in Revit” and locate the item in the model.

Search for missing lines

It detects all take-off lines having the same origin that take-off lines of the reference

and exist in the work but not in the reference. The user can view this information in the

corresponding layout and decide whether the deleted or included in the permanent

transfer.

Check

This process seeks “Guid” identifiers in all take-off lines of the reference in existing

measurements on the work. If exists this identifier, the two lines are matched, and oth-

erwise it is considered that imported line is new.

TakeoffLinesTmp.Checked

Indicates whether or not the line is checked.

Comparing lines are not taken into account some special fields. In each case the pro-

gram will take the right decisions.

Campo Performance

Relation You can change both the work item code as the chapter to which the line is

assigned.

Activity It fits the existing in the work of destination, if not exist.

Date

Type

UsrNum

Id

Are made of imported line.

Note It is taken from imported line. It allows transferring messages between

agents without considering that the line is different.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 72

Campo Performance

StateTgt It is not used.

Review and assign work items

The first step before the transfer is to review the work items and chapters assigned to

lines of imported measurement.

.OrgRelation

This field contains the chapter-heading covered by the take-off line is assigned rela-

tionship. Its content may come from several sources indicated in the table below:

Color Description

Chapter/Work item Relation of imported work.

Chapter/Work item Relation of imported work that does not exist in the work.

Chapter/Work item Relation that has been modified by the user.

Chapter/Work item Relation that has been modified by the checking process.

Colors and meaning of assignments of work items

.DescriptionSup | .SrcSupDescription

Chapter Summary or higher concept in the work and reference, respectively.

.OriDescription

Description of the work item in the reference.

.CodInf | .ScrCodInf

Code of the work item, the background color is taken from the state of concept work

and reference, respectively.

Mapping options

Suggest box lets to assign a work item or modify existing manually.

Several systems of automatic assignment, based on the “Code”, “FamilyBIM” and

“TypeBIM” concepts and measurements fields are also available.

By inferior code

Search on site the first relationship whose lower code equals the line time meas-

urement, and assigns temporary measure the relationship found.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 73

Per family and type (heading)

It searches on work the first relation whose inferior has a family and BIM type that

matches to the line of temporal take-off line. If found, assign the inferior code.

Per family and type (measurements)

It searches on the project the first take-off line whose family and BIM type matches

the temporal take-off line. If found, it assigns the inferior code of the relation of

the take-off line.

The concepts and relationships needed to attach the lines to pass that do not exist are

created automatically. If not possible, the line is not passed, the “State” field is as “Un-

tested” and “Action” field is like “Insert”.

Treatment of the activities

The activities that are assigned measuring lines in the reference may be the same or

different from the work.

.SrcActCode | .ScrActDescription

Codes and summaries of the activities of the reference. If there are differences with the

data of the work the background color shown in the table shown.

Background color Description By transferring

The activity exists in the reference and the

work.

It remains the same.

The work has an activity with the same de-

scription than the reference activity, but the

activity number is different.

It prevails the number

of the work.

The activity does not exist in the work. A new activity is creat-

ed.

The box suggest about the “SrcDescriptionAct” field to assign a take-off lines available

activities.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 74

Result of the transfer

.Action

This field indicates what will happen to the measurement line if the transfer of the work

is done.

Action Description By transferring

None Imported line and your partner in the work are identical

or not provide price changes.

Value: 255 or 244 (respectively)

Not transferred.

Insertion The imported line is new.

Value: 0

It is inserted in

the work.

Actualization The imported line and the work one are the same except

in one of the stage fields.

Value: 1

Stage fields are

updated.

Erasing The imported line will modify an existing line such that

will not provide any quantity to any pricing structure.

Value: 2

The line is de-

leted.

Actualization There are differences in fields that are not phase fields. A

popup when the cursor shows the differences detected

note, which helps make decisions.

Value: 4

New line data

are updated.

Erasing Take-off line existing in a work item of the current work

that is going to receive take-off lines of reference, but

that line is not among them.

It represents the case of elements that have been delet-

ed in the reference after a previous transfer and there-

fore should be deleted.

Value: 5

The line is de-

leted.

Color table for the field “TakeoffLinesTmp.Action”

The presented information can be modified, filter, sort and verify as much as desired to

be sure what will occur exactly when executing the transfer. If you modify a line that is

checked, it automatically becomes an unchecked line.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 75

Integration to BIM

The system integration between Presto and BIM is based on complete processes

geared to actual working conditions.

Revit catalogue

Complete information about the integration between Revit and Presto is in the manual

“Cost-It,” which is in the BIM of www.rib-software.2-inglés.

Allplan catalogue

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto, “Link with Revit and other pro-

grams.”

This option “File: Export” allows you to create a catalog with all codes of budget or a

price schedule, thus facilitating the association starting each entity model.

The catalog generated must be copied to the STD data directory, which should also be

the KATALO.TAB file

The catalog files are located in a directory whose name is the root concept code of the

work, the file is added KATALO.TAB

No supports catalog names with more than 8 characters.

XCA: Measurements generated with Allplan

By “FILE: Import: XCA” option, measurements are imported directly to the active work,

creating the necessary concepts if not listed in the file. To perform a previous check

before entering the take-off lines, you can import on an empty work and then add

them your work through “FILE: Import: Take-off lines.”

See “Presto in the project stage: Measurements: Importing measurements”.

Measurement of CAD drawing

The DWG drawings reader lets extracting take-off lines information from these files

from AutoCAD.

You can apply the same system to image files in the same formats of the “Gallery” win-

dow. These files contain not layers or entities, so that resources of measurement that

use these properties cannot be used.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 76

Only are described the specific options of the CAD window that are not repeated in the

main window of Presto.

File

In the CAD files that have model space and paper space, it’s taken in account only the

information of the first one.

External references or nested blocks in the plans are broken down to the last level.

Save the work

It saves within the project, attached to the chosen concept, the drawing is being meas-

ured, the state as- found, with defined zones and without the removed layers.

Double clicking on the thumbnail of this file, CAD window opens directly.

Working environment of the CAD window

Appearance

It determines the appearance of the entities that are being measured and the shape of

the counting point.

Colors

It lets you to choose in the AutoCAD standard table the colors of the measured entities,

the background of the drawing, the drawn lines and zones. The chosen color for the

measured entities is transferred in the manual measurement to the “Color” field and

applies to the comment.

Type of take-off line

Line type with are redrawn the measured plane lines.

VER

The display options are compatible with AutoCAD and are described in “VIEW: Gallery”.

Layers

The “View” button toggles the plane layers for easy viewing and limit the entities to be

measured. The layers that did not originally have measurable entities are not shown.

You can delete layers you do not have interest to this work. Its content disappears from

memory and is not stored on the project, but not altered in any case the original file.

If there is a concept with the same name of the layer, its summary appears.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 77

CAD entities

It displays the different types of entities, separated by color and line type or block

name. It is similar to the layers window, without the delete option.

Areas

The zones are rectangles that can be created on the map to:

• Add the name of the area to which belongs each entity to the comment of their

take-off lines. If it belongs to several zones, listed in the order defined in this

window.

• Restrict the automatic measurement to certain areas, disabling “View”.

• To zoom on an area quickly.

To create or redefine a zone, double-click on the “Zone” field or “Coordinates” and

check the two corners in the plane. Change the name if desired. The first zone corre-

sponds to all of the drawing; you can redefine and rename it, but if you delete all zones

will appear again.

Automatic measurement

It shows the plain measurable entities, such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines and blocks,

ordered by entity type and layer, and taking into account the activated filter options.

To associate a work item to one or more lines of this table, use the option of suggest in

the “Work item” field.

By associating an item is linked to the type of entity, layer, block name, color and line

type, allowing you to leverage the association in other drawings with the same charac-

teristics. The associations are stored in the “PartidasEntidades.TXT” of the directory file

of Presto. To remove the associations you have to delete the file.

Export take-offs

Icon of the subordinated window that generate the take-off lines corresponding to the

selected entities, and transfer to “Temp take-off lines”, where you can check and

change before final transfer.

If not selected lines, crosses all.

During the transfer:

• Filled the “File”, “Layer”, “Element” and “Zone” fields take-off lines.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 78

• In the “Color” field, inserts the entity color, as the AutoCAD table number, which

affects the commentary color.

• In the “Source” field enter the value 2, which corresponds to “DWG”.

• The comment of the take-off lines forms with the names of the areas containing

the full entity. If not, the file name is used.

• The length of the lines, or the area, if any, is transferred to the first unprotected

field size of the temporary window measurements.

• If there is, the height of the lines going to the field “Height”.

The measured entities are labelled in the drawing as described in “Working environ-

ment: Appearance” and are not remeasured.

To return to your original position active “TAKE-OFF: Measures to restore entities”.

TAKE-OFF

The menu has several options to set the drawing scale, formats and other alternatives

to manual measurement.

Scale factor

It converts the plain drawing unit to desired for measurement. If the plane is drawn in

inches, to obtain measurements in meters the scale factor should be 0.01.

Roundings

It rounds the plane values up the decimal places indicated.

Measurement format

It determines the properties of the take-off line:

Option Description

Sign

Changes the positive or negative sign of the field with the number of units

of take-off lines. If you move during a totalization applies to the total result.

Perimeter It measures the perimeter of the measured entities.

Area It measures the area of measured entities.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 79

Option Description

Total

By clicking the icon, the generated lines accumulate in a single line, which is

only transferred to Presto pressing the icon again.

By totaling identical lines the number of units is increased. If vary in a single

field, such as height, it’s added the field that varies. If vary in two or more

fields, the sum of the partial results comes to the first field of dimensions

that are not protected and in other fields is entered “1”.

Reference objects

It facilitates the manual measurement because accurately locates the selected object,

whose terminology is to AutoCAD.

Manual measurement

It lets measuring entities by marking them on the plain. To facilitate the data entry use

the options of “TAKE-OFF: Reference objects”.

The manual generation of take-off lines is similar to automatic, except that only takes

into account the known fields, depending on the type of entity and graph format. If the

entity does not exist in the plane, the color is set in “FILE: Working environment: Col-

ors”.

The generated take-off lines are inserted in the “Temp take-off lines” window, which

can be modified and transferred to the estimate’s own instructions in this window.

Option Description

Count Clicking on a point in the plane a mark is drawn and counted.

Existing entity It measures lines, arcs, circles, polylines and blocks existing in the plane,

selected one by one.

Line by two points Straight segment, the ends may or may not be existing points.

Continuous line It lets to measure perimeters or areas of polygons not existing in the

plane, marking their vertices. The line is automatically closed by noting

again the starting point (provided there is a proper way to refer to ob-

jects) or “Close continuous line”.

To finish without closing use “Cancel” or [Esc].

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 80

Option Description

Rectangle If areas are measured, the dimensions are entered in the first two unpro-

tected fields.

Other options

Option Description

Continuous line

close

End the take-off of a solid line to the starting point.

Cancel It finishes the take-off of continuous lines and entities that need more

than one point. It cancels any orders, and is equivalent to [Esc].

Measures to re-

store entities

It lets measure again the entities measured automatically or existing in

the plane and eliminates the marks of the manual take-off.

Drawing window

Party properties

Double-clicking on an entity supported by Presto, or via this context menu, appear their

relevant properties for the measurement, with the number of similar entities (or equal,

in the case of blocks), its length and its area.

You can mark new entities without closing this window.

Zoom by zone

It lets zoom in on any of the previously defined areas.

An information system

Besides economic data, the estimate may include many other information:

• General information about the project.

• Building agents involved in the building project.

• Specifications and additional files.

• Diary with texts, files, and economic data by periods.

• Prices per geographical areas, suppliers or other alternatives.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 81

• Integrated description of a group of projects.

• QMASS integrated quality systems, such as study and plan health and safety,

environmental management and quality control, as described in “The quality

management. QMASS”.

Data and general properties of the project

Presto lets saving in the estimate a set of general estimate data and information that

serve as the basis for generating other additional documents and to track the execu-

tion.

This information is organized in several groups:

• Data pertaining to the root concept.

• General variables used in the program.

• Variables defined by the user.

• Connections variables generated by BIM models.

Data

The root concept of the work has the same fields as the other concepts, but some have

special meaning.

The most important data for identifying the project can be entered in “Project settings:

Data”. Some of these fields appears while cataloguing projects with “FILE: Projects”.

To refer to a field of root concept within an expression, write:

Concepts [Nat == 0] .campo

Calculated fields contain the same results as other items, totalled for the work, and

consult on the same layouts.

.Code

The content is copied to the “Source” field of new concepts. It may differ from the file

name of the work.

To integrate estimates and projects this code must be different in all.

.Code2

The first three characters are used as a prefix to differentiate documents and records

created automatically in each project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 82

.PostalCode | .City | .Province

Los campos de código postal, ciudad and provincia se pueden rellenar con el botón de

sugerir a partir de uno cualquiera de ellos. El código postal afecta a la búsqueda de

proveedores.

.Category

Type of construction or use of the building, and is used to estimate the term.

The list of uses is on the assessed value, RD 1020/1993

.Origin

The suggest button shows the encodings prefixes and their basic natures, for infor-

mation. The automatic assignment of natures for new concepts is carried under “other”

in the fields of masks for natures section.

.SurfCons

The constructed surface of the work is the default value alternative unit of chapters.

Miscellaneous

Language

The chosen for the project, and affects the spelling checker and scripted texts, transla-

tion of dates and convert numbers to letters.

In the reports, it affects the function that translates:

tr(“language1;language2;…;languageN”)

The texts in the project languages are separated by semicolons.

The order of the language corresponds to the language list of this option.

When you create a project, the default language is contained in the language for the

program, which is selected in “FILE: Working environment: Generals”.

NumFloors

Used by some wizards and for generating documents.

ProjectCode

Reference data for documents and reports.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 83

Manpower | Machinery | Material | Others

Masks to automatically assign a nature based codes concept first introduced in the

work.

Supports wildcards “*” and “?”.

The concept whose code does not match the masks natures, is assigned nature “Depar-

ture”.

IRR

Internal rate of return of all receipts and payments.

Rate

Annual percentage rate to calculate the net present value.

VAN

Net present value of all cash flows.

The calculation of the IRR and NPV is made from the cash flows generated by maturi-

ties.

Calculation

Percentage applies only until former percentage

Round the base before calculating percentages

Check “Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Concepts percentage rate”.

Automatic subtotals in take-off lines

Check “Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Take-off lines and concept of activity”.

Percentage of indirect costs

Check “Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Indirect costs”.

Other additional costs

Check “Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Overhead, industrial profit and low auc-

tion”.

Consider only documents in approved stages

Check “Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Documents of economic con-

trol”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 84

Accounting

Name of the tax

It let replaces “VAT” by another text in reports.

Percentage of VAT on professional fees

Overall tax rate.

Percentage of VAT on construction works

Tax rate applicable to the estimate of execution.

VAT is calculated monthly

Monthly VAT calculation, rather than quarterly, while generating maturities.

Variables

The general data exists in all works and are complementary to the root data item.

Generally correspond to settings and data that have been introduced in each work by:

• Options box “Properties work” except in “Data” dialog.

• Answers given by the user in the reports, templates and wizards.

• The generation of variables by some accessories.

Are consulted on the “VIEW: Variables” window, in the layouts:

Origin Layout Creation

0 User Variables created by the user.

2 Common Options of “Project settings”, except “Data”.

It contains the variables name.

3 Reports and templates Answers to reports.

4 Reports and templates Answers to Word templates.

5 Reports and templates Answers to the Excel templates.

6 Wizards Wizards variables used.

8 Revit Parameters created by “Cost-It”.

9 Keyword Variable created by the keywords generator.

Variables.Variable

Name of the variable. Deleting a variable is removed from the “Terms” table that match

this name.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 85

.Value

Value of the variable.

.Description

Description variable.

.Type

Nature of the data that will contain the variable.

.Length

Size in bytes of the variable.

.Origin

Origin of the variable.

.User

It equals 1 if the variable has been modified by user.

.List

Wizards specific. It equals 1 if the variable is populated by a list of default values.

Specific variables “Cost-It” visible in the layout “Revit”

Some of these variables on the diagrams in terms of concepts, providing additional

parameter information from Revit.

.Tag

It indicates that the variable is to be exported or printed.

.DisplayUnitType

Unit of measurement.

.UnitType

Type of the measuring unit.

.ParameterGroup

Parameter group.

.ParameterType

Type of parameter.

.Shared

Indicates whether the parameter is shared.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 86

.StorageType

Storage type.

.ReadOnly

It indicates whether the parameter is modifiable.

.Guid

Unique identifier of the variable.

.State

Colors indicating any special properties of the variable, as can happen when exporting

with “Cost-It”.

This field can be modified manually using the contextual options for states or colors

available on any field in the “Variables” window. The color of the text in the field “Varia-

ble” changes depending on the option chosen.

Variables use

To use the value of a particular general variable prefix “Work” and the name of the vari-

able, which can be consulted in the “Variables” window layout “Common” is used.

For example, the variable that contains the length of the working day is:

Work.CalcDurLab

Using user variables

If a personal variable “AmountFees” is created, you can print its value in a report with

the expression:

Variables[Variable==“AmountFees”].Value

Groups of variables

Different groups are described below, and for readability, the full text of the variable is

used.

Agents of the industry

Entities that represent natural or legal persons involved in the project.

They are listed in the “Entities” window and let:

• Using data on estimates and other documents.

• Assign responsibles to the controls.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 87

• Participate in the project execution as suppliers or customers.

There are others entities that allow you to assign multiple prices to other concepts for

comparison, as described in “Presto at the stage of project: An information system:

Comparison of multiple prices”.

The agents follow the definitions of the Spanish LOE. If multiple the main is considered the

first by alphabetical code.

Other fields identify economic values are described in “Presto for the construction

company”.

Fields that have a specific use in the concepts of entity type are:

Concepts.PostalCode | .City | .Province

These fields can be filled with the suggest button from any one of them.

.Address | .Fax | .Phone | .Telephone2 | .Email

Other complementary data. Mail is used in offers asking.

.Country

Assigned country concept. The suggest button offers a range of countries.

.Collegiate | .Title

Professionals and agents data.

Specifications

Contract documents

REPORTS: 02 Other documents of the project: Statement of administrative clauses

This Word template generates a list of valid administrative clauses for conventional

building works executed with the traditional procurement and payment system, taking

into account the following variables:

• Warranty period.

• Term for withdrawal of equipment.

• System security of the contractor.

• Compensation by delay end of the works.

• Interest of delay.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 88

Technical specifications associated to the concepts

The text of the specification files are text files associated to each concept and a particu-

lar aspect, as described in “Attached files”.

To create a text of this type, from the thumbnails window:

• Use “Create Text File” or import a file in text format.

• Assign the desired aspect with the same context menu.

• Double-click if you need to edit.

REPORTS: 02 Other documents of the project: Specification special technical condi-

tions

This report generates the specification when all texts are associated with the concepts

of the estimate.

Technical specifications

Option from the “Tools” menu to generate the corresponding specifications of a work

from a price table with sheets.

The option generates a list with the texts in this table are the concepts of budget and

above all, in the order listed in the table.

It allows selection of facets to generate all or only part specifications.

The specifications for the price tables on which you can not deduct the superior con-

cept for each concept, as in some pictures of parametric prices compiled is generated.

Reference

Box containing the text of the statement. The location of the box is saved in “FILE:

Working environment: Master references: Specification”.

Save in Word

When exporting to Word heading styles are assigned to the chapters and subchapters

and facets have the style “Header”. In this way, you can create an index or easily change

the format.

Additional Files of the project

Besides all the predefined information that can store Presto, you can include a wide

range of associating files to different concepts, entities or dates. With it an added value

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 89

to the project by including technical specifications, assembly drawings or photographs

that guarantee the quality of the product is obtained.

It lets to associate files:

• RTF, to create specifications

• Word

• PDF

• Excel

• Vector drawings

• Photographs

• Video-Audio

• HTML

Associated files

They can be kept with the project all kinds of files, built to keep all information related

to it, such as:

• Reports, plans and texts for specifications.

• Pictures and videos for the monitoring of execution.

• Scanned originals documents.

• Spreadsheets.

• HTML files with links to pages or documents on the web.

A file can be associated with one or more concepts, to a document or budget, and are

always linked to a date.

• The concept files, document or date are displayed in the “Thumbnails” subordi-

nate window, described below.

• The files of all the project are managed together in the “Files” window.

Associating files

In addition to the menu options of the “Thumbnails” window, you can drag files in mul-

tiple ways.

• From the File Browser window to the window thumbnails of a concept docu-

ment or date. If you drag the thumbnails of the files window, they are generally

associated budget.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 90

• From the “Files” window to a thumbnail window.

• From a thumbnail window to another program. To drag from a thumbnails win-

dow to another, first press the [Ctrl] key.

Each file is saved in the original format in a file of the work.

Presto especially recognizes some formats, and clicking on these files gallery window

opens.

Type Available formats

Text RTF, TXT

Picture BMP, EPS, JPG, PCX, PNG, TIF, GIF

Drawing DWG, DXF, WMF

In other cases, the program that is associated with the extension in the operating sys-

tem opens.

The changes in open files cannot be saved again, except text formats. If you want to

change, save the file and import it again.

Fields of the files

Files are saved in the “Files” table which has the following fields:

Files.Code

Concept or document associated to the file.

.Id

Unique identifier created by the program.

.Name

When you import the file is the original name or the name of the aspect.

It can be modified without losing the relation to the original file, as shown in the “Path”

field.

.Path

Directory and file name at the time of importation.

Gray indicates that this file is not longer accessible and the red color means the original

file date is after the one of the “Date” field.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 91

.Date

Date of the imported file.

It can be modified if desired, but will not affect the original file. If the date is prior to

the file, it is considered that the file is not longer updated and is red. If the file does not

exist, it appears in grey.

.Hour

Date of the imported file.

.Type

File types recognized by Presto.

Type Value

Undefined 0

Facet Specification 1: ESP, 2: TEC, 3: PRE, 4: EJE, 5: MED, 6: CON, 7: SEG, 8:

GMA, 9: NOR, 10: MAN, 11: VAR, 19: TEX.

Parametric 20: PAR

Image 30: GRF

Revit Family 31: REVIT

.TypeThumbnail

Thumbnail file format . 41: JPG, 45: PNG.

Normally the thumbnails must be generated with programs homogeneous bits 32 and

64 together.

.Extension

Extension of the associated file.

.Bytes

Size of the associated file.

.ThumbnailBytes

Miniature size of the associated file.

.Facet

Text in RTF or TXT format of the associated file.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 92

Operate files

“TOOLS” menu option allows you to merge, update and export all attached files. The

total number of files specified in the option header. In “VIEW: Files” can restrict the

number of files to update or export, pre-selecting the files.

Update

It regenerates the thumbnails and also updates the files whose path listed in the “Path”

field, which are accessible and whose date is after to the “Date” field.

Export

It saves the files in the selected directory, forming the file name with the ID and name.

Merge

It recasts same files that are associated with more than one concept, thus reducing the

project size.

Operate with graphics

“TOOLS” menu option that lets you change the format of the selected images or creat-

ing images from vector drawings.

In the conversion to JPG you can specify the desired compression factor. The quality

obtained must be verified by testing.

JPG compression index 0 10 30 50 100

Approximate finished size (%) 100 21 11 8 6

We recommend using JPG for photos, PNG for geometric images.

Thumbnails

It displays an image for each file that is associated to the concept, document or date.

Thumbnails are created when importing different file types supported by Presto and

the other types whose extensions are associated to programs that can create them

from the operating system, such as PDF. The remaining records show a generic thumb-

nail.

Import

Imports a file to associate to a concept.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 93

Transfer file to text

It transfers the text from a text file to the main text of the document or concept.

Export

It exports the selected files, forming the name of the exported file with the numeric

identifier and the name. For RTF texts, aspect abbreviations are also added.

Create text file

It creates an associated file of RTF type, empty.

Aspects specifications

These options convert associated text files between different aspects of the specifica-

tions.

Associate thumbnail

It lets to associate an image as a thumbnail to the file formats not supported by Presto,

or change in the other files.

Multiples prices comparison

Presto has a system that allows you to assign different prices to each concept, with the

following objectives:

• Keep several prices for each basic concept, which may correspond to geograph-

ical areas, price tables or suppliers, and get the estimate corresponding to each

alternative.

• Request, receive, compare and awarding bids to tender complete projects.

Pricing assignation entities allow associate several prices to each concept to obtain av-

erages and make comparisons.

The pricing entities are created in “Entities” window, assigning the entity type as a na-

ture plus:

Type Associates prices to ... Utility

Price Work items and natures Pricing alternatives geographical areas, curren-

cies, etcetera.

Bidder Work items Compare bids for complete tender.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 94

The system operation is similar, and the differences are:

Properties Price Bidder

Applies inflation Yes No

Apply indirects Yes No

Use default price Yes No

Value if not assigned price Est NA

Introduction of the prices

The prices can be entered manually, creating the entity of the proper type and assign-

ing the prices in the comparison layout that corresponds to each type.

In the “Entities” window, “Price assignment entities” layout displays the fields that affect

some comparisons, as the dates and surfaces, and in the “All” layout identifying data of

the entities are displayed.

Entities whose status is “Gray” do not appear in comparison layouts or in the calcula-

tions. To incorporate an entity in the comparisons, you must assign it any state other

than “Grey”.

FILE: Import: Prices | Bids

These options import estimates containing prices of either types, creating the entities if

necessary.

Layouts of comparison of bids and prices

In the estimate windows are layouts “Compare ...”, showing the prices assigned to each

item for each of the relevant entities. Right layouts multiple fields, limited to 60 entities

of each type, excluding appear marked in gray. If multiple hidden field all hidden, and

re-display restoring the layout.

Remove from comparative

It assigns the “Gray” status to the entity specified in the header. Not displayed in the

comparison and does not intervene in the calculations.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 95

General layouts

In the “Prices” subordinate window, “In price assignment entities” layout, you can check

the prices given to the concept by the entity.

Annotation of prices

When an entity has not a price associated to the concept, there is not corresponding

relationship in the “Prices” table and the price is listed as “NA”, unlike the null. The [De-

lete] key makes a price in “NA”.

To replace the estimate prices by one of the entities, use the copy and paste options by

ranges, or [F7] “Suggest”.

Calculations vertical (entities)

Presto calculates the amount of the superior concepts from the prices given by each

entity to inferiors, using estimate quantities and the same colors and rounding criteria,

more the specific settings for each type of entity described above.

Calculations horizontal (concepts)

Presto shows the average of the prices assigned to each concept by all entities and its

standard deviation, taking in account the null prices, but not marked in grey or listed as

“NA”.

Because of these possibilities, the average of the higher concepts may not match to the

sum of the averages of the inferior concepts.

Concepts.MedPrec | .MedOfer

Average price of each concept in pricing entities.

.SigmaPrice | .SigmaBid

Normalized standard deviation, ie, divided by the average.

Relations.AmntMedPrec | .MedBid

Average amount for pricing entities.

Fields multiple price

The prices assigned to each concept by the different entities are stored in the “Prices”

table, which also contains the contract prices and the amounts of the linked estimates.

Therefore, this table includes all concepts fields with economic meaning.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 96

The table also contains the total allocated during calculation process to superior con-

cepts that have received them directly.

Visible fields in the comparison layouts are as follows.

Prices.Entity

Code of the entity that assigns the price.

.Code

Concept code the price assigns an entity.

.Relation

Code formed by the sum of the entity and code fields.

.Code2

Alternate code.

.Est

Price entity assigned by the concept, other than contracts.

.Amount

Product of the price of the entity multiplied by the quantity of the estimate.

.Price

Prices quoted by suppliers to the supply of each contract.

.UsrNum

User numerical value associated to a relationship between a concept and a pricing enti-

ty.

.Description

Original description of the concept in the entity.

.Note

Alternative short text.

.TypePrice

It is 1 if is a calculated price.

.State

State the price of a concept for a pricing entity.

Black / Green: taken in account.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 97

Net / Grey: Not taken into account.

Projects integration

Presto lets you manage, consolidate and view information from multiple estimates or

projects, integrating them into a project called central.

This integration allows:

• Create and maintain databases with the prices and quantities of work items and

other concepts that have been used historically in other budgets, including the

currency in listed and the date, allowing estimate whether the data are outdat-

ed.

• View all estimates economic data together and projects in progress, consolidat-

ed by dates, areas or any other grouping criteria.

• Consult the agents of the building which have intervened in each of the pro-

jects.

The integration is divided into two distinct parts:

• Consolidation in a central work of key data that are in the linked work described

in this section.

• The management of financial documents, described in “Presto for construction

company: Centralized invoicing”.

The linked data to the structure of the estimate, such as certification, planning, con-

tracts and production, are made and always kept in the projects by separate. However,

in the central project all data necessary for the consolidation are saved, so the results

are always available, although some project is not available at the time or has been

deleted.

In all cases, each project continues to have an independent existence, and information

in the central project is updated only when indicated.

Coding of the linked projects

To take advantage of integration is desirable to use an uniform coding, establishing a

unique code for each concept you wish to consolidate, as chapters, work items, suppli-

ers, suppliers and destinations.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 98

Link work

This “PROCESS” menu option lets you to associate or link a project to a central, creating

a concept of “Project” nature in the level of detail immediately inferior to the root con-

cept. The created concept contains the project overview.

To better observe the initial results, it is convenient to use the “Projects integration”

layout, of the estimate windows.

The “Code” of the linked project is automatically formed from the Presto file name, but

can be renamed at will.

You can create linked projects manually writing the project code to integrate, and allo-

cating the nature “Project”. The suggest button on the “File” field allows you to choose

the project to link.

Partials grouping in a central work

You can group works to get totals for delegations, zones, customers, or any other

group of projects you want. This arrangement is done by creating chapters represent-

ing different groups, and as inferiors, should include the linked projects to the corre-

sponding grouping.

Properties of the concepts of project type

They may have inferiors but do not affect their amounts, as they are relevant to its orig-

inal project.

Concepts.File

Filename of the linked project.

.Path

Directory where the linked project appears.

It supports relative paths to the location of the central project:

Path Open the linked project located in

(Blank) The same directory in which the center work is located.

..\ The higher directory to the central work one.

ZONE-B\ The indicated directory.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 99

Check the linked project

It is an alternative to open works quickly in the context of projects integration.

Open project

Open the linked project corresponding to the clicked row.

Update information

This option of the “PROCESS” menu updates:

• The concepts of nature “Project” from the root concept data of the linked pro-

ject, except “Code” and “Date”.

• The concepts of marked type, and if you have any of QMASS management sys-

tems, the information corresponding to the activated module is updated.

• The diary associated with each linked work, if you have the corresponding mod-

ule.

The linked works to be imported must be calculated.

The projects updating does not alter the hierarchical structure of the central project,

since imported concepts are not inserted under other concepts or their children con-

cepts are imported. Nor does it eliminate concepts from the central project, although

they are not longer used in any linked project.

To update the information of the plant, the terms of each concept of the work, and in

turn creates the variable are included. If the variable already exists, not modification is

performed on their properties.

Parametric concepts and percentage type are not imported.

The amounts of each work are linked in the center in their original currency, so it

should be taken into account when analysing.

Concepts.Date

Date of the last time was updated the linked project.

If the work:

• It is not updated, the field has the background in red.

• There is not, the field has a gray background color.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 100

Consult in the central project the linked projects data

General information of the projects

Information available from the linked works consulted and managed with the same

resources that isolated estimates. That is, if the user wants to see the projects certified

amounts, is seen in the same window and layout that he would see in an isolated pro-

ject. In this case, in the estimate windows, certification layouts. If you do not want in-

clude the data in the central project, you can cancel the project price or the quantity,

for example to avoid duplicating the amounts of alternatives or variants of the same

estimate.

Linked data to each work linked

The information is consulted on windows estimates, subordinated window “Pricing of a

work”. This window has the necessary schema information for each type of data, and

generally shows the elements with some content.

The list of associations linked data query works in the main window “VIEW: Prices” in

the layouts of project.

Data associated with the concepts

Are consulted in the “concepts” window, subordinated window “Prices”. This window

has the necessary layouts to see what works each concept has been used.

You can see the total quantities of a concept in each project, zones or groups of pro-

jects, as well as for the total of the central project.

Data of entities and suppliers

Are queried in “Entities” window, “Prices” subordinate window. In the layouts you can

see data of the financial management of each supplier in each project, areas or groups

of projects, as well as the total central work.

Associated data management system QMASS

They are displayed in the “Systems Management” window, “Prices” subordinate. In the

layouts can view the works in which the management system entities and agents of the

building are.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 101

Data assigned to dates

In the main windows of calendar and date, the information is available on the entire

central, except stages or certifications. The data associated with each work dates are

consulted on estimates windows, subordinated window “Diary”, using the right layouts

for the information you want displayed. Fields belong to the “DiaryWork” table, and are

equivalent to the corresponding fields of “concepts” and “Diary” table.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 102

Presto in the planning stage This chapter describes Presto processes that are usually performed in the pre-contract

stage, after the draft and before starting the execution of the project:

• Economic planning.

• Financial planning.

• Temporarily planning.

Economic planning

This planning contains the needed information to describe the model of revenues and

costs incurred in the work, and is based on two complementary estimation groups:

• Cost target.

• Accrual scheduled of the execution.

Planning can be done by chapters, work items, basic concepts, activities, time periods,

building agents, and a long list of possibilities.

Economic model and pricing structures

The editor of the estimate only considers a price and a measurement, which are in the

project. During certification a new quantity, which applied to the unit prices of the es-

timate leads to the certificate amount appears.

The rows represent the five quantities indicated on the left, from estimate to the execu-

tion of the work. The value N is the index is used to refer to the structure in some areas.

The columns represent the unit prices indicated in the header. Estimated in the esti-

mate price estimated cost columns are added before starting the work and the actual

cost, known at runtime.

Other cells contains results calculated by Presto, applying the quantity of the line mul-

tiplied by the price of the column, either for a work item, for a chapter or the whole

project. Blank cells are insignificant combinations.

Economic model

Presto applies a work model summarized in the table, in which the possibilities of the

program are based.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 103

N Price

Quantity

Estimate

Est

Price project

Target

Tgt

Estimated cost

Real

Real

Real cost

1 Estimate

Est

According to the

editor

project

Est

Estimate

Estimate

2 Certification

Cert

According to the

project manager

Cert

Certification

Certification

3 Execution

Real

Quantity really

executed

RealEst

Production

Production

EV

RealTgt

Earned value

Earned value

AC

Real

Real cost

Current cost

4 Target

Tgt

Reviewed meas-

urement by the

constructor

TgtEst

Final production

Target produc-

tion

BAC

Tgt

Target

Budget at

completion

EAC

TgtReal

Forecast

Estimate at

completion

5 Planning

Plan

Target to

the current time

PlanEst

Plan production

Planned producti

on

PV

Plan

Planned Value

Planned value

The economic model of Presto

Name fields of the economic model

The Presto field name that contains the output of each cell is made to the field of the

amount over the price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 104

For example, production to date, which is the actual amount for the price of estimate is

given in “RealEst”.

If the price and quantity are of the same structure, the field is written only once, as in

“Est”, which is the product of measurement for the price of the estimate.

Several variants on estimate approval states are also contemplated.

AmntTgtEstMod, is the amount of planned production which corresponds to the initial

estimate.

All fields are made available from the name, and putting the prefix table, as shown be-

low.

Value Prefix Example Meaning of example

Price Concepts.Est Unit price of the estimate.

Quantity Qty Relations.QtyReal Take-off or actual performance of a

concept in its superior.

Amount Amnt Relations.AmntEst Product of the unit price multiplied by

the number at the superior.

Quantity

total

QtyTot Concepts.QtyTotTgt Total quantity of the concept in the

target.

The concepts prices are always unitaries, without multiplying by the quantity. Accord-

ingly, in the work items and basic natures the price of certification, “Concepts.Cert”

matches the price of the estimate, “Concepts.Est”. In these types of concepts are just

different unit prices, one for each column, while chapters and the whole project may

have different the ten prices.

Using the model

The estimate amount contained in the cell of the first row and the first column, corre-

sponding to the quantity and price of the project.

The amount of the certification, in the bottom cell, is obtained by applying the certified

quantity at all times to the estimate unitary price.

The lower three cells in the same column contain the production, valuing to estimate

price the planned total project, planned and executed, from the constructor point of

view.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 105

The remaining amounts follow the terminology of cost control system known as

“earned value management” and its initials are capitalized.

Breakdown of the fields

From the point of view of time, the quantities are of two types:

• The amounts of estimate and target are not broken down temporarily and fields

that depend on them are in the windows of the estimate.

• The quantities of certification, planning and execution are planned by stages,

usually months. These quantities and fields that depend on them are broken

down into multiple fields stages of the estimate windows, the subordinate stag-

es window and windows agenda and dates.

Each field can be broken down in turn by state estimate approval.

Comparisons between amounts

For comparison between two amounts is significant must belong to the same row or

the same column. Thus, the effect of price or quantity that share is cancelled each oth-

er and the ratio shows the difference due to another field.

For example, the deviation in cost is obtained by comparing “Real” and “RealTgt”, since

these values apply the actual cost and estimated, respectively, to the actual quantity.

The difference measures the deviation in costs, without being affected by possible dif-

ferences in quantities.

The program also calculates some significant percentages.

Fields Meaning

PerCertEst Percentage certificated over the estimated

PerPlanTgt Percentage of planned work to date versus total planned work

You can easily get other percentages, deviations and comparisons using user fields or

reports, such as:

Expression Meaning

Est - Cert Certification pending

TgtReal - Real Probable pending cost

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 106

Phases of the economic model

The stages are temporary periods when the project tracking is divided. Its creation and

overall operation described in “Project management: Certification”.

The operation is similar for the three pricing structures susceptible to scheduling by

stages: planning, execution and certification.

The quantities and the planning amounts, certification and execution only include the

values of the approved stages. Thus, at any time of the project can be compared with

each other the three scheduled values.

If you have entered forecast values of execution or certification, you can temporarily pass

the later stages to see the totals.

The sum of the planning to the end of the project is the target.

As certification, the quantities can be entered directly in each stage or by take-off lines.

In this case, each line may be associated with a different stage for all three structures.

If the parent concept is another work item, you can have take-off lines for breakdown, but

cannot be associated to stages, except the planning, to be part of the target.

The project amounts based on these quantities are also scheduled and are available

disaggregated by stages, from the work items to parent concepts.

Revenues estimate and target of cost

The economic planning lets obtain a cost estimate, or target estimate, which represents

the project execution estimated cost from the point of view of the construction compa-

ny and serves as the basis for bid presentation, versus the project estimate, that repre-

sents the sale or income.

In the “PROCESSES” menu there is a wide range of resources to automate, update and

reorganize the structure of the target estimate.

Either estimates can be obtained from the other, and may have:

• Various cost and sales prices, which can be obtained by applying a margin or

transfer coefficient, with corresponding amounts.

• Different quantities, if the construction company get different measurements to

estimate, reviewing the draft project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 107

Economic planning also allows scheduling the execution of target in stages, to get a

temporary breakdown of the cost, control the execution terms and analyse the finan-

cial.

From the point of view of the project manager or developer, this planning can be ap-

plied to an target obtained as a copy of the estimate, without differences in quantities

or prices.

Introduction of the target cost

The cost target is introduced into the layout “estimate and purpose” of the windows of

the estimate, which is parallel to the revenue estimate. The production costs are in the

fields with the “Tgt” prefix.

You can quickly create the target from the estimate by “PROCESS: Generate target”

option.

Income

In private work, the estimate directly represents the net income corresponding to its

execution.

In public works, if defined indirect cost percentages and other additional costs, reve-

nues used in the comparisons should include these values.

Relations.AmntEstAdj

Award amount, consisting of the estimate plus the usual percentages in public works.

.AmntTgtEst

Total planned production or the total expected income. It is calculated as the target

quantity valued at estimate price. Used to calculate incomes when the target quantity is

different from the estimate.

.AmntTgtEstAdj

Planned total production including overhead percentages of public works.

Cost

In amounts corresponding to the target cost, the program does not apply indirect costs

and other additional costs.

Indirect costs and other expenses attributable to the project, which do not correspond

to certifiable concepts, can be incorporated into specific chapters of the target and is

convenient assign it the “Indirect costs” category.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 108

.AmntTgt

Expected final cost or amount of the target.

Comparison between income and cost

The difference between the sales price and the cost represents the margin or profit

earned on each concept.

Margin

It calculates the difference between expected production and cost target.

Generate target

It lets generate the target cost from the estimate or vice versa, changing the prices of

marked natures.

It can be applied to the entire project or just the chosen concept inferior concepts,

showing the reference current value, from which the changes are made in prices.

The quantities are copied from the pricing structure of origin to destination:

Quantity behaviour

Work items and

breakdown

Are always copied.

Quantities In the work items are copied as indicated in the option.

When generating the target, stage “1” of planning is assigned to the estimate approved

take-off lines.

While generating the estimate, the state “Initial estimate (black)” to take-off lines with

planning stage is assigned. Neither the chapters with category “Indirect costs” are cop-

ied.

Update target decomposition

It replaces selected prices target price decompositions by the existing ones for these

same work item in the reference or selected price table.

Do not alter the target prices of concepts that already exist in the estimate. If the work

item does not have decomposition in the reference, directly copies the target price.

This option does not alter neither the breakdown nor the estimate price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 109

Restructure target decomposition

It eliminates or consolidates by natures the concepts of target decomposition of select-

ed work items. You can also group into one all consolidated concepts, with an identical

text to which the work item it belongs.

In each selected work item it adds the amount of selected nature and creates a new

inferior:

• The new code is formed from the initials of the merged concepts that match up,

to three, plus the code of the work item.

• The summary is the nature, plus the name of the work item.

If the new concept exists, the amount is set and the description is not altered.

Consolidate work items

It consolidates the selected work items into a single concept. The structure and esti-

mate prices of the original work items are not altered and not act on awarded con-

tracts.

The take-off lines are not consolidated, since they correspond to units of measurement

and different prices. The resulting work item can have in its decomposition the consoli-

dated work items, with its measurement and target price of the original estimate.

In addition you can perform the following actions:

Cancel target on source data

The new work item has quantities and target prices, and in the original work items the

quantities of target and planning are cancelled.

Add to bar chart

The work item appears on the Gantt chart and the original are fold.

Convert to supply

The new work item is bought or subcontracted.

Break down work items by activity

It separates a work item in another, each of which contains the take-off lines assigned

to each activity, in order to plan, contract them or execute them separately.

The work items generated for each activity, in turn, can be optionally merge into one.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 110

The applied options to the created work items are described in “Consolidate work

items” option.

Break down work items by decomposition

This option lets separate a work item in two or more, that be executed, planned or con-

tracted separately.

To do this, it generates a work item from another, inserting in its target decomposition

the difference in yields between estimate and target of each of their inferiors, so are

two work items whose targets are complementary of the original unit.

The applied options to the created work items are described in “Consolidate work

items” option.

To view in parallel and easily modify the estimate and target yields, you can use the

layout “Estimate and target”.

Features of the new work item:

• The code is formed by adding a numeric suffix.

• The summary is the same as the original.

• The quantity in the target equals to the original work item.

• The quantity in the estimate is zero.

Fill economic planning

Target quantities are introduced similar to the certification:

• Overall for the work item, the “QtyTgt” field.

• Estimated disaggregated implementing the “QtyPlan” field of each phase, which

can be seen in multiple fields to the right phase.

• Broken down in take-off lines, associating to each line the planning stage for its

estimated execution.

The sum of the quantities for all stages is the target.

Economic planning is to accrue the target cost.

Planning is called the sum to the current certification at all times, which can be com-

pared well with certified or actual execution.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 111

The distribution of quantities by stages can be performed automatically using this op-

tion, which fills the quantities of planning by stages of the work items, erasing the exist-

ing planning.

In cases where the quantity is small and the period of distribution is large, schedules

are obtained with very small quantities or fractions, which are standardized in the last

certification to match with the intended target.

If the calculation precision is increased, the setting will be better.

See also “Purchasing and subcontracting: Calculate resources”.

Options to fill the planning:

Using bar chart data

It takes data from the technical planning of the Gantt chart.

It divides the target quantity in each work item in stages corresponding to the estimat-

ed start and end dates of the work item, depending on labor days involved.

Applying planning weights from each certification

It divide the target between different certifications, applying a coefficient or weight to

each, thus obtaining the expenses theoretical planning.

The weight that each certification has in the planning, is introduced in the dates win-

dow, where the user can indicate the fitted values to their experience or use the sug-

gested values. A file is delivered in Excel format with various models of distribution

curves for planning costs, from where you can copy different values of weights.

Fields that lets the planning by certifications are in the “Dates” window, “Planning” lay-

out, and are:

Diary.WeightPlan

Part of the costs target that is estimated to perform on the stage, or certification.

The suggest button has several alternatives:

• Weight distributed linearly.

• Pendant weight, up to 100.

• Estimated weight to form a Gaussian curve.

These options take into account the number of existing certifications in the project; add

or remove the necessary for proper distribution.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 112

.OrWeightPlan

Accumulated weight until certification.

.PlanTheor

Amount of the theoretical planning by weight of certification.

.OrPlanTheor

Accumulated theoretical planning until certification.

Applying to the work items the planning of the activities

Divide the target for activities, using the earliest possible dates or late, ASAP and ALAP

dates respectively.

It applies to the work items having all the objective take-off lines with activities. From

the total target, the amount corresponding to each phase based on the estimated dia-

gram for activities stuffed dates.

Result in a take-off lines for each different stage and planned activity, which is not in-

cluded in the estimate is added. If the result exactly matches an existing line take-off

lines, the planning stage match without creating a new line is entered.

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Temporary planning: Amounts by stages depend-

ing on the ASAP-ALAP dates”.

Results of economic planning

Reports of the group “03 Economic planning”:

Estimate and target

Comparison of income and costs. It takes into account indirect costs, overhead, profit

industrial and low auction.

Target summary

Same as above, but by chapters.

Revenue and cost planning

Project planned work items grouped by stages or months, and compare expected reve-

nues and costs in each stage.

Chapters and work item with stages

Chapters and work items with the stages of certification, execution and planning.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 113

Quantities or amounts by months

Chapters and work items with the quantities or amounts by months.

Financial planning

The system is based in the creation of forecast invoices and their maturities, from:

• Revenues, calculated from the planning or certifications.

• Expenses, calculated from the planning or contracts.

As a result of the balance of the respective maturities, daily cash flow is obtained.

Create invoices

This menu option “PROCESS” creates pension bills for all phases of execution of the

work, or the current certification.

Check “Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Documents of economic con-

trol”.

With each invoice also are created maturities, including those corresponding to with-

holding and taxes, depending on the payment methods associated to the supplier or

customer.

The process removes existing forecast invoices. To convert invoices into definitive associate

the black state.

In the options that associates the invoice to the developer or builder takes the first by

order of code, if more than one.

The “Document” field of the invoice is formed by adding the “AccSuppliers” field of the

entity associated to the invoice.

Concepts.Supplier

On concepts used in this process to assign a certain income or expense to a developer

or builder, different from that in the work.

All stages

With these options, invoices are generated for all stages that have quantities, and let:

• Make a planning of income and expenses from the available data, such as eco-

nomic planning, certification or contracting.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 114

• Obtain the cash flow of the project.

Income (from the planning estimate price

It represents the amount of certifications according to the planning.

It is calculated based on economic planning, valued at estimate price, including the

percentage of cost overrun as indirect, industrial profits, overhead, and low auction.

Invoices are assigned to the developer.

Income (from the certifications)

It represents the amount of the certifications.

Are calculated as above, depending on the certification.

Invoices are assigned to “Developer”, except if in the work item “Supplier” field is an-

other “Developer” or “User”, which is assigned to them.

Expenses (from planning)

It represents the expenses associated to the execution of the project.

It is calculated based on economic planning, gathering the necessary concepts for exe-

cution by stages and supplier.

Invoices are assigned to “Contractor”, except if in the concept “Supplier” field is any,

which is assigned to it.

Expenses (from contract)

It represents expenses associated with hiring or purchasing management.

In awarded contracts, are calculated and associated under the conditions of the con-

tract.

In non- award contracts, are calculated to price target and are associated to the con-

structor.

Current stage

An invoice for the actual certification is generated.

It’s used to send isolated certifications to the developer, or to send preform invoices to

suppliers contained in awarded contracts.

Certification to the promoter

It invoices to the developer, with the work items of the current certification to the esti-

mate price and their overrun percentages.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 115

Associated suppliers, to the contract price

Invoices for each subcontractor listed in the “Supplier” field of the work items, with the

certified or actual quantity of the current stage, to the contracted price.

Subcontractor’s invoices

Supplier Breakdown* Quantity to be transferred to the invoice

Regular Yes Quantity of the approved stage.

Regular No Total quantity minus the sum of the invoiced quantities of the

work item to the same supplier.

Cumulative Yes Sum of the quantities to the current certification.

Cumulative No Total quantity.

* Has quantities in stages or take-off lines

Results of financial planning

Results can be viewed at:

Window Layout

Invoices Suppliers, customers

Maturities

Dates Month: Invoices

Dates Month: Receipts and payments

Diary Invoices

Diary Receipts and payments

Finance cost (Dates: Months)

Expression that calculates the interests from cash flow and % interest or rate. This ex-

pression can be included in a user column of the window and layout described therein.

The rate should be entered in “VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous”.

Temporary planning

The system of temporary planning Presto includes numerous specific resources for con-

struction, and generally involves the following steps:

1 Time: Set time and date of the project, and calculation conditions.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 116

2 Select the tasks and their behaviour.

3 Determine the duration of tasks.

4 Situate the tasks in time.

Planning

Most global variables involved in the planning and their calculations are defined in

“VIEW: Project settings: Planning”.

Hours per labour day

Labour days per month

It let adjusting the calculations of durations and times.

Simultaneity factor for activities

It indicates the proportion to which each task overlap with other tasks for the calcula-

tion of the durations by cost.

Category

Functional typology, defined in “Project settings: Data”, which affects the estimate of

the period of the project.

Works duration in months

It affects the calculation of durations based in costs.

The suggest box of this field provides an estimate of the period according to the model

described in Predicting Construction Duration of Building Project, developed by Joe

Martin, Theresa Keoughan Burrows and Ian Pegg.

The data have been adapted to the conditions of construction in Spain from real pro-

jects compiled by Presto.

The result depends on the estimate amount and the type of project.

DateEstimate: Date of estimate

Is assigned to the “Date” field of the newly created concepts and it is the initial refer-

ence date to calculate the IPC for each concept.

DateContract: Contract date

Award date, reference to the start of the repricing.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 117

DateLicense: Date License

Date of obtaining of works permission.

DatIniWork: Date of start of the work

It indicates the beginning of the bar chart display.

DateWorkEnd: Date of completion of the works

It affects to the end of the Gantt chart display and to maturities of warranty withhold-

ing.

Select the tasks and behavior

behaviours or types of tasks

The behaviour of each task is assigned by menu options windows estimates and bar

chart.

Option behaviour Value Nat

Rate job summary Their dates contains those of their

inferior concepts.

4 Chapters

(trades)

Work items

Calculated dates They have their own duration and

their dates depend on their prece-

dencies with other tasks.

0 Work items

Activities

Contracts

Dates from superior Are adapted dates and duration

of its superior concept.

3 Operations

Control type

concepts

Unplanned task It excludes the task of Gantt graph

and is equivalent to cancel the

“DurTot” field.

Value: Fields “TypeDateIPlan” and “TypeDateFPlan” table “Relationships”.

Planning can be altered by changing the behaviours as desired, with the following re-

strictions:

• Summary type tasks should have some inferior task with calculated dates.

• Not are shown calculated tasks that be inferiors to another calculated tasks.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 118

Unplanned tasks can go back on using the filter “All” in the diagram, or from the esti-

mate windows annulling “DurTot” field.

Relations.NullDurTot

Equals 1 if the “DurTot” field is cancelled.

.TypeDurTot

Vale 3 if the “DurTot” field is calculated (magenta).

Special behaviours

You can force the content of the dates regardless of the task type.

Blocked date

The user sets the date manually and does not account for the calculations.

If you move the full bar graph, the start date is set.

If you move the right end of the bar, the duration is changed.

The locked date is deleted by selecting one of the types of task.

Relations.TypeDateIPlan

This field contains the value that corresponds to the behaviour or way of calculating

dates.

It equals 1 if the date is locked.

Date unlocked

The user unlocks the date is calculated based on the precedencies.

Concepts.DurUnit

Concept unit duration in hours. It is calculated based on the target cost, and if not, is

calculated based on the estimate.

Duration of tasks

The time duration represents an effort measured in days of work, while the cost dura-

tion represents the reasonable total term of execution of the task.

Fields involved in these calculations are usually seen in the “Durations” layout of the

Gantt chart.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 119

Relations.DurTot

Duration of task execution in days. It’s a property of the relationship between the con-

cept and the superior, so that a task in more than one superior concept has several

total durations.

You only need to enter task durations with end date of calculated type, i.e., based on

the precedencies.

This field fills each user, and the “Suggest” button provides two large groups of esti-

mated values: those calculated from the target and calculated from the estimate.

In general, the estimates described below, any mention of the lens is also applicable to

the estimate.

Estimates of the duration by time

.DurTgtTmp

Estimation based on the task daily production, total production, taken from the target

quantity in the parent, and the number of teams in their relationship.

.Equipment

Number of equipment / manpower working simultaneously on task during the execu-

tion of the above concept elements.

The suggest button indicates the number of equipment needed to perform the task in

the total period, calculated from the duration by time and cost.

.ProdDay

Daily production of the task in execution of the superior concept.

Presto suggests the likely values, depending on the income of the inferior concepts that

match the following conditions:

• Its nature is equipment or manpower.

• The unit of measurement is comparable to hours. Just the unit starts with “h” or

“H”.

It’s calculated as the inverse of the yield of each of the inferiors, multiplied by the num-

ber of equipments allocated to the relation, divided by the difficulty of the superior and

converted to days. The daily production by default is the smaller of these results,

rounded.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 120

Estimations of the duration by cost

They are based on the ratio of the total period of the work displayed on “Project set-

tings: Times”., And the target relative cost between task to total work

.DurTgt

Estimate based on the total target cost of any task, including the concepts of contract

type and activity. It is calculated based on the term of the work, the relative cost of the

task and the coincidence factor described below.

.DurTgtRec

Estimate based on the proportion of the cost of the resources of manpower and

equipment the task for the whole work.

Requires that the task has lower concepts of these natures.

Task concurrency

To obtain an accurate estimation of the cost duration there is to estimate the number

of simultaneous tasks. For example, assuming that on average two tasks are performed

simultaneously, the duration can be twice that obtained in proportion to the cost .

Presto has an unique mathematical model to estimate the number of simultaneous

tasks. This number is proportional to the project number of tasks, since in a larger pro-

ject more operations are performed at the same time, and is inversely proportional to

the relative cost of each task, as weighty tasks in the project tend to be made with

more efficiency and resources.

The number of concurrent tasks, which can vary between one and the total number of

tasks, can be set between these extremes by a coefficient that is introduced in “VIEW:

Project settings: Planning”.

• 0 indicates not simultaneous tasks and therefore its duration is the minimum

possible, with the cost obtained.

• The value “1” indicates that all tasks are executed at the time and therefore last

as long as the project.

The sum of durations of all tasks will be longer than the duration of the project, except

that the simultaneity coefficient is zero. The adjustment to the actual conditions will be

made by precedence relations.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 121

Relations between tasks: Precedence

For dates must be entered precedence relationships between tasks or between the type

of guy “Dates of the top” and “calculated Dates” “calculated dates.”

They look and edited in the subject window “Precedence” of the bar chart.

You can also create links between tasks dates above and calculated, taking into ac-

count:

• The tasks must belong to a different superior concept.

• The connection establishment from the task type to the calculated top type.

• In special cases, data gaps and ALAP dates do not apply.

The links can be created graphically by dragging the predecessor over the successor

task, as the style of Microsoft Project.

The graph of the diagram, the [Tab] key moves successively between different links.

By establishing a precedence of tasks with blocked dates, do not suffer any change. The

user must decide to unlock them or not.

Double clicking on a link to filter the corresponding links.

To delete a precedence, check the link and press [Delete].

Precedencies.Type

The following linking types are supported:

Link Meaning Creation

End-Start The successor can start if the pre-

decessor ends.

Final of the predecessor over the

initiation of the successor.

Start-Start The successor cannot start before

the predecessor.

Starting the predecessor over the

begin of the successor.

End-End The successor cannot finish before

the predecessor.

Final of the predecessor over

the end of the successor.

Start-Start

End-End

Double link, which combines the

above two types.

Begin of the predecessor over the

end of the successor.

Invalid links are black

.CodAntecesor | .CodSuccessor

Codes of concepts predecessor and successor, respectively.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 122

.ResAntecesor | .ResSuccessor

Summary of the concepts predecessor and successor, respectively.

.Overlap

The overlap indicates the number of working days in the beginning or end of the suc-

cessor task is separated from the beginning or end of the predecessor. Depending on

the type of bond, the overlap can be front, rear or combined. The part of a link that

corresponds to overlap is represented by the arrow thicker.

.OverlapAfter

Is overlap of End-End type at the double link.

.Critical

0: Not critical

1: Ahead

2: Behind

3: Both

4: Error

Create precedence

Create successive links of type “End-Start” between tasks.

You can create precedencies over:

• The selected tasks, creating successive links between them, even over all the

tasks of the project.

• On the active task, choosing predecessor, successor, or both.

Selected with dates calculated under the same Superior, which have not predecessors

The following conditions must be met:

• The two tasks must be the same type of concept.

• The closing date for the predecessor must be calculated.

• The initial date of the successor must be calculated and must not have prede-

cessors.

Among selected by spaces that do not have predecessors

It is acting on concepts of nature “Activity” whose “Activities.Space” has content. The

precedence created by alphabetical order of the contents of the field mentioned.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 123

Date calculations

If automatic price calculation is enabled, the start and end dates of the tasks are calcu-

lated based on the durations and links, every time there is a change that affects them.

Otherwise, select “CALCULATIONS: Time planning”.

The start date of tasks without predecessors is the start of the project.

The closing date for each task is the day after completion.

A zero duration task has the same start and end dates.

If impossible restrictions are detected, for example, if a fixed date requires to start a

task before its predecessor, its link is olive green.

Start End Meaning

DateIPlan DateEPlan Earliest possible date: ASAP

DayIPlan DayEPlan Consecutive number of working day since the start of the

work, applied to dates ASAP.

DateLITotal DateLETotal Latest possible dates without affecting the end of the pro-

ject: ALAP

DayIUTotal DayFUTotal Consecutive number of working day since the start of the

work, applied to dates ALAP.

DateIReal DateEReal Current dates.

Fields of the “Relations” table

The ASAP-ALAP dates are used to calculate different amounts by stages, as described

below.

Relations.TypeFecIReal | .TypeFecFReal

Thay have value 3 when the dates are calculated (magenta).

Advances

Percentage Meaning

PerDatePlan Percentage elapsed on the planned duration.

PerDateRealPlan Percentage of real execution elapsed over the real duration.

Fields of the “Relations” table

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 124

View clearances

The clearances are days that can be delayed / advanced tasks, and are represented by

frames may overlap.

Clearance Campo Weft Meaning

Total ClearanceTotal \\\\\\\\\ Days that the task can be delayed

or increase its duration without

affecting the end of the work.

Free ClearanceFree ///////// Days that the task can be delayed

or increase its duration without

affecting other tasks.

It’s shown superimposed on the

total clearance.

Internal InternalClearance \\\\\\\\\ Days that can interrupt the task or

increase its duration. It is always

visible in a thin bar that is drawn

from the start of the ASAP task.

The fabric of the clearance adapts

its color for better viewing.

Duration | | | | | | | It is a special case of the free

clearance, in which the section

which exceeds is drawn (duration)

but not the sharing.

Fields of the “Relations” table

Break tasks

When the task duration is less than the difference between the start and end dates, the

gap is at the first start date and the difference is represented as internal clearance.

This case is the usual tasks where the successor double bond is shorter than the prede-

cessor, as can occur with plastering and painting.

Critical path

A task is critical if not total float or have slack time and his successor is critical.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 125

It is displayed by red links.

Amounts by stages depending on the dates ASAP-ALAP

They are based on the duration tasks in each stage, and can be seen in the windows of

the stages or in the Gantt chart.

Stages.PerASAP

Percentage of activity corresponding to the stage according to dates “DateIPlan” and

“DateFPlan”.

.OrPerASAP

Percentage of origin of the activity corresponding to the stage given dates “DateIPlan”

and “DateFPlan”.

.PerALAP

Percentage of activity corresponding to the stage according to the dates “DateIUTotal”

and “DateFUTotal”.

.OrPerALAP

Percentage of origin of the activity corresponding to the stage given dates “DateIUTo-

tal” and “DateFUTotal”.

.EstASAP | .TgtASAP | .TgtEstASAP

Estimate amounts, target and estimated total production, corresponding to the per-

centage of the activity according to the earliest dates, contained in “PerASAP”.

.EstALAP | .TgtALAP | .TgtEstALAP

Estimate amounts, target and estimated total production, corresponding to the per-

centage of the activity according to the later date, given in “PerALAP”.

Calculation of amounts

For fields relating to amounts are calculated, must be checked the “Automatic price

recalculation” option.

In terms of work items and activities, is calculated based on the percentages of each

type.

A chapters level, are calculated as the sum of the amounts of lower concepts.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 126

Gantt chart

The hierarchical structure of the bar chart is the same estimate, although the concepts

are in again and may be different.

In this context, the items shown in the diagram are called tasks, and their number is

limited to ten thousand.

The basic natures never appear in the diagram.

Tasks listing

This window has basically the same functionality as the diagram. The difference is that

the tasks are not hierarchically, but as a list, and bear masks on the code.

Display options: Lists

The windows of bars have drop-down lists to select the types of tasks, schedules and

fields to be displayed in the graph area.

Task filter

In the bar chart to select the type of tasks to be displayed. You can be deployed like

any hierarchical levels window.

Layouts

Different combinations to display dates of all types, lengths and gaps.

Fields to display next to each bar

Choose fields to display on each task bar. The fields are table “Relationships” and user

defined in the diagrams window bars.

Fields to display by stages

Choose fields to display on each task and phase. The selectable fields are the “Stages”

table, and the user are defined in the subordinate window “Stages” layout “Certifica-

tion”.

Icons: Bars and graphic elements

Precedences

Shows or hides the sub window of the same name, which is the type of link and the

overlaps.

Display bar chart

It displays or hides the graphic to the right of the window.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 127

Increase scale | Decrease scale

It modifies the timescale to view details for days, weeks, months, years or stages.

Display planned dates

Toggles the display of bars ASAP. The color of summary tasks type making appearance

options for chapters defined and validated items, and tasks take the defined activities.

The date of taking the top include a green line at the beginning and end of the bar.

View clearances

It enables or disables the display of the clearances.

ALAP

Enables or disables the display of the ALAP bars. The overlap region of the bars of the

ASAP and ALAP tasks is painted darker color.

Display real dates

It enables or disables the display of actual dates bars.

Links

It enables or disables the display of the arrows on the precedence between tasks.

State type tasks

It enables or disables the display of the days in which there has been a change of state

in tasks.

By activities

Color the ASAP bars in proportion to the objective of each activity in the total amount

of the task.

The color of the activity is assigned to the “Activity.Color” field of the “Activities” win-

dow.

Dates

In the diagram the following special dates are marked:

Dates Color

From the start of the work until the current certification Yellow background (*)

Among the current certification and the last defined stage or

date of completion of the work

White background

Other cases grey background

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 128

Dates Color

Holidays Vertical red line

Final date of approved certifications Vertical black line (**)

End date of current certification Vertical green line (**)

(*) It takes the background color for protected columns

(**) Appear if a field is selected phases in the list

Depending on the scale applied at all times, may be other lines-guide points that facili-

tate the location of task-date

Aids

A track on each bar shows your description, duration and dates.

Center bar

On any field of a task, position the Gantt chart from the beginning of the chosen task

bar.

Results of temporal planning

Reports of the group “04 Temporary Planning”:

Gantt chart

This report is displayed with characteristics similar to those that have the window of the

bar chart when printing or exporting, as the timeline, dates and phases lines, bars dates

of tasks, slacks, states and selected fields for display, among others.

Therefore, before generating the report should set the bar graph window to fit the way

you want to print.

It’s recommended to generate the complete diagram and export it to PDF with the “Pa-

per size: Entire document” option, where you easily manages the printing on printers of

different sizes.

Precedences

Predecessor and successor tasks and dates.

Tasks and resources

Tasks and related data on all their resources.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 129

Plan-It: Convert the estimate planning

The aim of this process is to convert an estimate based on a schedule.

An estimate is made up of work items that represent objects or entities of the finished

building, oriented price calculation. A schedule is a list of the processes needed to run

these objects.

• The work items are centers of income, ie partial results measured building re-

maining in the finished work and may be paid by the promoter. They reflect the

way in which the work is estimateed and contracted but not necessarily the im-

plementation process.

• The execution, however, is based on activities related trades and time sequenc-

es.

The coincidence between objects and processes needed to execute them, or unit of

work and activity, is possible, but only occurs in some cases. Normally, a work item is

split into several activities, according to different criteria, or more units is merged into

activity, and there are many more cases that are possible and common.

• Items that are unique from the point of view of the unit of work requiring sever-

al processes such as a floor, in which separately running the formwork, placing

steel and concrete, or the various layers of a wall.

• Other small entity objects are grouped to form an activity, as the various ele-

ments of the electrical systems of a home.

• In many cases, the objects of the same unit of work should be grouped in a cer-

tain way for its implementation, as structural elements, which are executed by

plants or facilities that are run by housing.

Also appear combinations of the above situations and other special cases, all of which

prevents planning is generated fully automatically.

When you have complete and well-structured estimates, as those from BIM systems,

the information they contain can be exploited to avoid creating planning from scratch.

Plan-It helps convert the estimate planning, with several added benefits:

• The use of generic boxes or user’s own prices allowed to use all available re-

sources to allocate resources and other data to the work items, allowing even

more planning results.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 130

• Planning activities include source and associated with model elements BIM, so

obtaining a visual 4D planning is immediate.

The conversion process is not intended to be used as the Presto program to plan the

project,but is intended as liaison mechanism between the BIM system and the desired

program planning, as an added result to obtain the estimate.

The operations that can be performed on the estimate, in addition to applying any oth-

er option Presto, are:

• Remove work items from planning.

• Add activity planning.

• Create activities by decomposition of work items.

• Create activities for groups of items.

• Create activities division work items or activities.

These possibilities generally keep the original unchanged, so you can continue to use

the work as estimate cost model.

The above processes are designed to be applicable on. For example, it is possible to

separate headings for activities or work items merge and then separate the activities

resulting by spaces.

The data needed to apply the breakdown and grouping processes are properties of

concepts (respectively, decomposition and field “Group”), which can be taken of price

tables, and data for the division BIM model may come from so that the conversion pro-

cess of estimate planning can be virtually automatic.

General rules that are common to the options described below:

• The estimate does not change, especially in critical areas such as prices and

quantities.

• Each line will have as measuring activity which has qualified at each process.

• The activities created preserve unity and group work item or source activity. The

summary is copied when the source is unique, and in other cases is generated

as the sum of abstracts and codes involved.

• The quantity of an activity is always 1.

• Relationships where the lower concept is an activity not support measurements.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 131

• work items or activities not processed if they are marked as “not scheduled

task”, either because the user marked them or come from an option that leaves

the planning.

Remove concepts of planning

The context menu option “unplanned Task” can be applied to the work items or chap-

ters not want to plan. It is also used when a unit of work will be broken down into sub-

headings but do not want to consider any of them.

The option affects the relationship with the top, not the concept itself, so a unit can be

removed from the plan to a chapter and not in another. For the same reason, the state

of the option is also copied when copying from other works price tables or relation-

ships between concepts, as in the case of sub-headings.

The unplanned work items are still seen in the tree of estimate and appropriate layouts,

if you want to include them again.

Add activity planning

It contains more planning activities that may come from an estimate, such as indirect

costs, health and safety, quality or waste management, licenses, approvals, procure-

ment and other restrictions, which determine both the dates and the terms of the exe-

cution.

Además de insertar actividades manualmente, como cualquier otro concepto, se

pueden crear actividades or grupos de ellas en cuadros de precios and arrastrar al pre-

supuesto. Estas actividades pueden contener los recursos necesarios para ejecutarlas,

por lo que aparecerán también en la planificación resultante.

take-off lines manually assigned to activities will remain as such if the work item to

which they belong is marked as unplanned.

Create activities by decomposition work items

Many work items require more than one activity for execution. For example, a forged

work item results in various activities such as formwork, steel and concrete placement.

This option allows you to create several activities for a unit of work based on concepts

that are lower unit labor type and are not marked as unplanned. These concepts can be

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 132

real part of the breakdown of the price or introduced only to create activities with zero

price, such as the setting.

Each activity is created by adding the code, the summary of the work item and the sub-

heading, the unit of measurement, the group and the length of the latter. The activities

are inserted at the same level of the work item and it is marked as “not scheduled task”.

The price is calculated by multiplying the measurement starting performance by sub-

heading and its unit price, and is locked (red)

The new relationship between starting and activity has bypassed quantities and is a

“calculated dates.”

If the work item has measurements are copied to each of the sub-headings:

• Assigned to the newly created activity.

• Not appear on any phase or contribute much to the estimate.

• With the amount corresponding to the measurement starting performance by

sub-heading.

Thus, in each activity they are identified the elements that compose them and then you

can apply other chain transactions, as the division work items or activities.

Create activities for groups of items

Many units have work to form a business entity as such and often merge with other

similar, for example, all the concepts of the electrical installation inside a house.

This option creates an activity that brings together several work items.

The code of the activity that you want to merge each unit of work enters the “Group”

field. Only work items placed under chapters, having take-off lines containing this field

shall be merged.

The “Group” field has existing facilities for purchasing groups; for example, suggest box

allows choosing it in the box set to “Master references: Groups”. In this case, it was also

taken as a summary of new activity that has the group in that work.

If the code group does not exist as a concept in the work, an activity is created with

that code under Chapter lowest level that is superior to all units work with that group.

If the group code already exists as a concept may be several situations:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 133

• If the group corresponds to a chapter or unit of work items with that group they

will be consolidated into a new activity, placed under that chapter or by that

unit of work, with the “Grp_” prefix in the code.

• If the group corresponds to an activity, this activity is used.

If the concept is not inserted in the structure of the work, is inserted where appropriate.

No action will be executed if the group code is the same unit of work and does not

appear as any other group.

The new activity is common standards for measuring unit and summary.

Create activities division items or activities

Many work items need broken down into activities grouping all the elements of the

same plant, as with the execution of the slabs, or other group, including the separation

in many activities as take-off lines.

The option lets you choose which measurements alphanumeric field used to split

(Comment, Element, plant, etc.).

The field defaults to the “Division” field, where the user can enter criteria consist of

combinations of other fields, or you can choose one of the fields of measurements

from the dropdown list.

Features:

• The option creates an activity for each different value that appears in the chosen

field in the work item or selected activity.

• Lines without content are not taken into account.

• The code in the resulting activity is formed with the unit’s work division.

• The “Activities.Space” field has the same content as the chosen field by dividing.

• The activities that share the same space also share color activity.

• This association can be used to check or when desired, for example, in the activ-

ity window.

• The activities are inserted at the same level as the original work item, which is

marked as schedulable.

• It is not copied to the original measuring lines, and each line is reassigned to

the activity that suits you.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 134

• Measuring lines of the original work item are assigned to the activity created

from the division.

Convert to planning

Create the necessary activities according to the groups assigned to the work items and

divisions of the take-off lines.

They are running on the options for creating activities:

1. By decomposition of work items.

2. By groups of work items.

3. By division of work items or activities.

Default values are used and the tree structure of the work in the right order is trav-

ersed.

Before using this option you must ensure that the contents of the field “Stages and

activities.Division” has the right values to create the desired activities.

Primavera and Project link

Presto has several connection options with these programs.

• Import to Presto a Primavera project. Refer “Primavera” section.

• Assigning to the work items of an estimate the planning or the certifications

made on a Primavera planning, but do not match either the structure or the en-

coding used. Refer to paragraph “Integrating the planning and certification of

Primavera”.

• Export a estimate of Presto to Microsoft Project or Primavera. Refer to “Pri-

mavera XML” section.

Primavera

“FILE: Import” option inserts into a Presto estimate one XER file generated by Pri-

mavera.

Content of XER file is added to the estimate, so in general, it is desirable start from an

estimate without content. If the XER file contains specified information of several pro-

jects, you have to choose the appropriate node to import.

The chapters and subchapters are taken from the WBS components (WBS).

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 135

The activities become concepts of type “Work item” or “Activity”, according to your

choice.

The resources are associated to their work items, classified as “Manpower” (manpower),

“Equipment” (No manpower) and “Materials” (Materials). Costs (Expenses) are assigned

to “Others” nature.

The concepts code is formed with an identifier of the XER file that guarantees the exact

correspondence between the estimate and the planning. Visible codes in Primavera are

stored in “Code2”.

The type of activity is stored in the “ Group” field and is identified by colors:

• Net: Begin milestones.

• Green: end milestones.

• Gray: Activities of type description.

Financial periods become stages. It’s assigned as approved stage which corresponds to

the “Data date” of “Primavera”.

If there is an advance by percentage, is stored in the “Relations.PerAdvance” with the

content of “phys_complete_pct” Primavera field.

It also reads the start date of the project, the price of manpower hours and the working

hours of the day.

After the importation, prices and times are recalculated, if activated the automatic cal-

culation of prices.

Import only cost activities

This option only imports activities with non-zero price.

Import as Activity type concepts

It let importing activities from Primavera as concepts of type “Work item” or “Activity”.

Temporary planning

While importing planning, it overwrites the data for the selected option in each case:

• If there are equal precedencies are deleted, and new are created.

• If there are dates of beginning, of end and durations, are updated.

• If the dates of begin and end options are marked, or target dates, real dates

begin and end are updated.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 136

Options for importing planning:

Durations and precedence

It imports the original data, in order to modify and recalculate with Presto. It is possible

that differences due in “Primavera” is possible using multiple calendars, and the use of

other criteria.

Links “Begin - End” are not imported, but the double links “Begin-Begin/End-End”.

Start and end dates

Start and end dates, early and late, provided by Primavera. Dates are left locked so that

they can be used without modifications. Primavera does not provide the dates from

today (“Data date”), so in a initiated work the target dates should be used.

Target dates

Original estimates (target) of the start and end date provided by Primavera, which are

maintained even if the project is started.

Primavera XML

With this option of “FILE: Export” a file is created in XML format, with the structure of

chapters and work items, resources, activities and temporarily planning.

Before importing with Primavera the Presto generated files, check the “Resource Ini-

tials” option is activated, which is in “Import: Template”, “Resources” tab.

Microsoft Project

This option “File: Export” file is created in Project format with the following data:

• Structure of chapters and subchapters (summary tasks type)

• Structure work items.

• Resources classified materials and labor.

• Amounts obtained from the budget.

• Durations.

• Total hours of work-related resources.

• Precedence.

• Estimated dates of beginning and end of planning.

• Proportion carried out with respect to certification.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 137

Presto in project management This chapter describes the processes that occur during the execution from the point of

view of the director of execution or the project manager:

• Tender offers for complete projects.

• Certifications.

• Track cost.

The earned value (EVM) for the construction manager described in “Service request”

from Presto website, under “Certifications”.

Tender bid for complete work

This system compares the received bids on a basis estimate, applying to their meas-

urements the different prices received for the work items. No adjustment is made.

The general process described in “Presto at the stage of project: An information system:

Comparison of multiple prices”.

The entire process of comparing bids is:

Request offers to different bidders

There are several ways to ask for price to bidders:

• Send a Presto project without prices and without decomposition.

• From previous project, export to Excel, selecting the level of “Chapters and work

items”.

• On paper, with the report “Estimates and take-off lines”, without prices.

Receive the bids

Bidders fill prices and return the offer, which is incorporated to Presto as the format

received:

If it is a Presto project, by “FILE: Import: Offers”.

• If is a bid in Excel by “FILE: Import: Excel”.

• If it is on paper, you must perform the manual process of creating an entity of

“Bidder” type, and type the prices in the layout of bids comparison of the esti-

mates window.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 138

Compare the bids

You can review in the layout of comparing bids, or on paper.

The reports show the lowest bids in green, which facilitates their analysis, and are in the

report group “05 Certifications”:

Compared offers in horizontal

Compared offers in vertical

These reports show the structure of the estimate and prices offered by each of the sup-

pliers, the paper orientation indicated on each.

Update the estimate prices with the successful tender

The bids prices can be copied and pasted into the price that is right for its interpreta-

tion, either the estimate or the target.

The certification

Certification is the process by which quantifies and approves the measurement of each

work item in a given period for payment to the contractor.

Are only certifiable items that are under a chapter.

The certification amount is calculated using the estimate unitary price to the cumulative

certified quantity, or to the sum of certified quantities in approved stages.

Stages or certifications

They are periods of time between the days marked as “Certification” on the dates win-

dows, and generally are months.

The stages allow accrued analysis of different types of information, such as economic

planning, execution and production.

The certified quantities can be entered:

1. No breakdown, writing the quantity certified from the origin

In the estimate windows, “Certification” layout, directly typing the quantity in the work

item.

Relations.QtyCert | AmntCert

Certified quantity of work item and amount, respectively. It can be calculated from

stages and take-off lines.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 139

2. Breakdown by certifications, stages or months

In the estimate windows, type-certification layouts, which are those activate the “Multi-

ple fields” icon. To display certifications from a specified number, select the number in

the “Stage” dropdown list.

Stages.QtyCert | Cert

Certified quantity in the stage and amount, respectively. It can be calculated from take-

off lines

3. Breakdown by detail take-off lines

In estimate windows, subordinate window “Take-off lines”, “Estimate and certification”

layout.

For the rest of pricing structures similar resources are used.

TakeOff.StageCert

It is the field that represents the number of certification or stage.

To certify take-off lines must fill this field with the stage number in which each certified.

The drop-down list containing existing certifications in a logical order can be used.

To certify independent take-off lines of the estimate, you have to uncheck the “Est”

fields of the window, to prevent new lines are included in the estimate.

Not alter the data entered in previous certifications

To not modify the values of the take-off lines and the prior certifications to the current

stage, there is an user option that greatly restricts those changes.

Refer to “FILE: Working environment: General: Lock editing of approved certifications”.

Create dates and certifications

This “PROCESS” menu option lets you to create stages or certifications, and add to the

diary the days between two dates, but does not delete or alter existing certification

dates.

The “Default” button takes as its starting day the last day of the month following the

last existing stage; if not certifications, making the start date of the work. The number

of months it takes the term of the work. The above data are the properties of the work

on time.

If you do not want to create certifications enter a “0” in “Day of certification”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 140

The result is seen in the “Dates” window in the stages layout.

In order to stages match to the months, is assigned as certification day the last day of

each month. Still, two complementary results are obtained, since the months are add-

ed by annuities that you see in the “Diary” window, and certifications are for the total

project.

To create isolated certifications or with other periods, you must first create the dates,

for which you can use the same option above, and then check the end date of each

stage as “Certification”.

Certification is also created to assign a take-off line to the next available number.

Stages.Certification

The certifications are numbered consecutively and the take-off lines are associated to

the number, not the date.

Stages.Date | Diary.DateDMA

Date of certification or stage of the stages and dates windows, respectively.

Changing certifications

In the “Dates” and “Diary” windows, you can delete the stages deleting the rows, pro-

vided they have not associated data.

In the estimate windows, are eliminated by the choice “Clear stage” on the head in

one of multiple fields.

In both cases the later stages are automatically renumbered.

Not a certification day

For a date stops be of certification is assigned as “Not a certification day”. The associat-

ed data to that stage and all subsequent move to the next stage. Therefore, to remove

a day certification with data, must exist at least one free day of certification to the end,

without data.

Certification

If it’s assigned a date as “Certification” between two existing ones, the associated data

to the latest stages moves forward one stage and the last certification remains without

data.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 141

Change the date of certification

Select first the new date as “Certification” and then convert the other date “No

certification”.

Remove certified quantities in stages

In “VIEW: Activities and certifications”, “Certifications: Certification” layout, you can se-

lect the “QtyCert” column the certifications to remove:

• All, selecting the entire column in the header.

• A group of cells, by selecting a range of fields.

• A certification number, filtering by content on the number of certification to

remove, and selecting the filtered column.

Removing the selected information by pressing [Delete].

Assigning the current certification

It can make a certification as current using the context menu:

Window Paragraph

Dates, “Stages:” layout On certification to be approved.

Estimate

Tree

Add a multi field of stages, on the header of the cer-

tification to approve.

Stages, subordinate of the estimate

windows

On certification to be approved.

Current certification

It’s one of the most important data in project management, because it returns the sta-

tus of the project on a certain date or period. Depending on the type of open window,

the field indicating the number, date, quantity or certification amount is seen in a dif-

ferent color.

Diary.State

The phases can be divided into various states of approval, which significantly influence

many calculations by Presto.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 142

Stage or certification Value Meaning

Approved

0 Stages previous to current, all approved.

Current certification

3 Last stage approval or certification.

Pending

2 After the current stage, all unapproved.

The quantities and the amounts of different pricing structures are available disaggre-

gated by these states, and are in the fields of the table “Relations” whose suffixes are

“Ant” and “Act”, for example:

Relations.QtyCertAnt | AmntCertAnt

Certified quantity in the previous certifications to current.

Relations.QtyCertAct | AmntCertAct

Certified quantity in the current stage or certification.

Official certifications

In official work, to the total amount obtained for the project, which already includes

indirect costs, are applied the same percentages that convert the PEM in the awarding

estimate. To this total amount cumulative (to source) is discounted the equivalent

amount of the previous certification.

Price revision

The price revision is the correction of the amount of each certification to take in ac-

count the prices increases from the award date. Presto can apply the normative for

public works or recommendations for private work.

The prices revision coefficient can be calculated by an Excel sheet supplied with the

program, which can automatically read from the open project the two dates of refer-

ence for calculating: the award of the contract date and the current certification.

The sheet contains the polynomial formulas Spanish legislation and official inflation

indexes, materials and manpower published to date. The sheet is open, so you can re-

view, modify or supplement to adapt it to any other form of calculation, rule or custom.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 143

Stages: Repricing

This layout of “Dates” window shows the amounts required to submit a certificate in

public works.

To facilitate the application of the price revision, Presto also shows in table header two

data:

• The date of the contract or award of the project.

• 20% of the estimate, which is not usually applied the revision.

The program always applies the introduced revision coefficient, and must be included

the unit in the stages where should not be applied.

The layout includes the following fields:

Diary.Cert

Amount of current certification referred to PEM, including direct and indirect costs.

.OrCert

As above, but cumulative to origin.

.Accredited

Month credited amount, applying to the certification the percentages of structure ex-

penses and award coefficient.

.OrOfficial

As above, but cumulative to origin.

.Kt

Coefficient review entered by the user prices. It can be calculated with the book Excel

mentioned above, and may vary depending on the type of work to be certified.

.Review

Amount of price revision, using the Kt.

.Num

A free field to add an additional amount.

.Cash

Net amount, sum of the above, without tax.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 144

Results of certification

Reports of the group “05 Certifications”:

Certification with take-off lines

Typical certification model with multiple combinations to see whether or not the take-

off lines, texts, prices, current certification data, and a summary for each chapter and

work item.

Summary certification

Chapters include expenses, profit, low auction and taxes.

Quantities and amounts of a certification

Value of work items certified in one stage, month or certification.

Current and cumulative certification

List of certified work items, disaggregating the values corresponding to the current or

approved certification, previous to the current, and total up the current.

Summary of current certification and cumulative

Chapters disaggregated by current or approved certification, prior to the current, and

the totals up the current.

Comparison of quantities up to the present stage

Compare different pricing structures and other combinations.

Table of new prices

Work items that do not have quantity in the initial estimate are considered, but are exe-

cuted and collected, i.e., are certified.

Certification invoice

Invoice model that represents the current certification.

Liquidation of the certification

Settlement model used by many governments.

Valued relationship

Certification model used by many governments.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 145

Cost tracking

In this section the economic control system is described from the point of view of the

works director or project manager, based solely on the information contained in the

estimate and certifications.

The project management has two goals:

• Track changes arising throughout the project.

• Estimate the actual progress and expected final cost.

When certification is globally introduced for the work item, by stages or specific take-

off lines, estimate independent, you only have information of two values: the total es-

timate and the current certification.

The comparison between them is only significant if the project to be executed is exactly

what is described in the project.

The use of approval states in the take-off lines, allows for comparisons that add useful

criteria for a more advanced tracking.

Check “Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Measurement by statements of ap-

proval”.

Estimate by approval states

When take-off lines with approval statuses are used, the estimate amounts disaggre-

gated by each are obtained, and are in the “Estimate by statuses” layout of the win-

dows:

• “Estimate”.

• “Activities”.

• Subordinated “Activities”.

[Concepts | Stages].Est

The price that contains the take-off lines of the initial estimate and the approved

changes, or current estimate.

.EstIni

Part of the price corresponding to the take-off lines of the initial estimate.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 146

.EstMod

Part of the price corresponding to take-off lines associated with approved changes in

the estimate.

.EstPend

Part of the price of the concept that corresponds to the take-off lines associated to

changes of the estimate, pending of approval.

Relations.QtyEstIni | .QtyEstMod | .QtyEstPend

Quantity corresponding to the take-off lines allocated to each state.

.AmntEstIni | .AmntEstMod | .AmntEstPend

Amount that corresponds to the take-off lines allocated to each state.

.AmntEstPossible

The possible estimate, which is the current estimate plus the estimate pending of ap-

proval.

Certification by approval states

To certify an existing take-off line in the initial estimate, just have to associate it to the

corresponding stage.

• The quantities does not correspond to the initial estimate for the project are in-

troduced into new take-off lines, associated to red (pendent) or green (ap-

proved ) status, depending on its situation.

• When the certified quantities correspond to the estimate, but have not direct

correspondence with their take-off lines, specific lines of certification are creat-

ed with the “Est” field unchecked, is order not to alter the estimate.

• If a part of the estimate not to be executed, the change is introduced by a line

with a negative sign, in the green state.

You can unfold an estimate take-off line to certify one part and let the another pend-

ing.

The disaggregated amounts represent the portion of that certification corresponding to

each approval status, and are seen in the “Certification by statuses” layout contained in

the main windows of estimates, activities, and in “Stages” subordinate one.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 147

[Concepts | Stages] .CertIni |.CertMod |.CertPend

Part of the price corresponding to the certified take-off lines for each state.

Relations.QtyCertIni | .QtyCertMod | .QtyCertPend

Number of certified take-off lines for each state.

.AmntCertIni | .AmntCertMod | .AmntCertPend

Take-off lines amount certified for each state.

Comparisons between estimate and certification by approval states

The estimate comparison, the certification and the pending part in each state of ap-

proval, gives a good tool to know the project state.

You can compare, for example:

• Certification in black state, which corresponds to the original project, with the

initial estimate.

• The approved certification, in status in black and green, with the current esti-

mate.

• The full certification, with the possible estimate.

Each comparison provides a different information, depending on the reference or base-

line chosen.

Evolution of the estimate as the execution progress

As certifications is being approved, the estimate current value is also saved, so that you

can see its progress over the execution of the project.

These values are in the estimate windows, in certification layouts and in the stages win-

dows, in “Est”, “EstIni”, “EstMod”, “EstPend” fields of the “Stages” table.

Following the same criteria, the values for the target costs and other estimates based

on the target, in the “Tgt”, “TgtEst” and “TgtReal” fields are also saved.

Other combinations of fields

The program calculates all combinations of prices and quantities disaggregated by

states.

The fields name contains the pricing structure and the state, in the following combina-

tions:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 148

Value Prefix Structure Status Structure

Quantity Qty Ini · Mod · Pend [N]

Amount Amnt Ini · Mod · Pend [N]

Amount Amnt Est · Plan · Real · Cert · Tgt Ini · Mod · Pend

For amounts can be used both ways

The “N” indicates the index pricing structure, according to the table of the economic model.

Fields are always of the “Relations” table, because the unit prices of the items are iden-

tical for all states, for which the differences appear only in the quantities and amounts.

Campo Description

Relations.QtyIni [1] Concept take-off lines in the initial estimate.

Relations.QtyMod [3] Quantity executed the concept corresponding to approved

changes.

Relations.AmntEstIni

Relations.AmntIni [1]

Amount of the concept in the initial estimate.

Relations.AmntPlanMod

Relations.AmntMod [5]

Amount of planning that applies strictly to approved modi-

fied.

Relations.AmntEstPend

Relations.AmntPend [1]

Amount of changes of the estimate pending of approval.

Relations.AmntRealPend

Relations.AmntPend [3]

Amount of the executed part of the project pending of ap-

proval.

Results of monitoring cost

The breakdowns and comparisons by state are available:

• In layouts of states of the estimate windows.

• In the estimate windows, activities and stages subordinate windows.

• In the main window of activities.

Reports of the group “05 Certifications”:

Measurements by states

Chapters and work items with breakdown of take-offs by state approval.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 149

Comparative summary of modified

Chapters with breakdown of amounts by approval states.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 150

Presto for construction company This chapter describes the processes to be performed to monitor the cost from the

point of view of the construction company:

• Procurement and subcontracts.

• Control of production.

• Invoicing and other documents of accounting and management of one or more

projects.

• Analysis of costs and expenses.

The Earned Value Management for the construction company (EVM) and the Economic

Information System (EIS), as described in “Service request” web of Presto, “Contracts

and orders, billing and control” section.

Procurement and subcontracting

Presto calculates the resources needed to carry out different processes:

• Calculate the necessary equipment and operators.

• Create contracts.

• Analyse the performance from a financial point of view.

The procurement process can be automated considerably if a work group is prepared

to buy, and then the appropriate groups are assigned to each supply in the works.

The resource calculation previously requires to define how to execute the project con-

cepts, dividing them into two major sections:

Supplies

• Those who will buy or outsource.

• The concept nature icon is coloured orange background.

• Are purchased or contracted, and their inferior concepts, if any, are not taken in-

to account for the purposes of execution.

Destination

Also called cost centers.

• Those who are to be manufactured or will be receiving of allocations.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 151

• The concept nature icon is green background color.

• It can be work items, chapters, or any other concept created that you want to

know its cost.

• A destination can be part of another destination.

• The root concept is always a destination.

It assigns to a concept the property of a supply / destination

The assignment is done via the context menu on the “Code”, “NatC”, “Nat” or “ Type-

Cost” fields.

Concepts.TypeCost

.TypeCostX

Type cost TypeCostX Meaning

Supply 1 Purchased or outsourced to third parties.

Path 2 It runs on the work or other form by grouping. Equivalent

to the cost center.

Contract 3 It groups suppliers to solicit bids to the same type of

supplier.

Undefined 0 Concepts unclassified.

The supplier code is in the header field and the full name appears on the track help. For

example, the work items that are decomposed should uncheck as supplies to obtain the

number of operators simultaneously present in the work or the amounts disaggregated

by natures. Once calculated the resources, you can return to the previous situation.

Fill groups

Groups can represent different classifications, and it is the user who decides interpreta-

tion.

In the hiring process or families are lots of products that are outsourced or purchased

from the same suppliers. The allocation of groups allows grouping supplies for the cal-

culation of resources and the creation of contracts.

In other processes, they may represent any type activities to associate each concept,

thus providing another grouping criterion.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 152

Concepts.Group

Classification, lot or purchase family assigned to a concept.

This field can be included in any layout that shows data concepts, or watch it:

• Estimate, layout “Resources and purchasing groups”.

• Concepts layout “contracted supplies or orders”.

The group code can be written by hand, and may or may not correspond to an existing

concept.

The “Suggest” button displays the groups listed in the table of groups described below.

If not box assigned groups, displays chapters of the work itself.

The concepts without group are assigned to the first group that has superior. Thus,

generic groups can be assigned to chapters and need only assign specific concepts

lower desired groups. For example, if a group and concrete core to another chapter of

structures is assigned, separately they obtain the resources needed to implement the

structure and for the supply of ready-mixed concrete.

If you must purchase the same concept to more than one supplier can:

• Using the same concept and break down after the contract.

• Duplicate the concept and assign another code entry to two groups.

The group, family or lot of purchasing associated to each supply can be assigned man-

ually, or globally via this option of “PROCESS” menu, which has several criteria to

choose.

Groups box

It is a work of Presto you choose “File: Working environment: Pictures: Groups”. The

work can be prepared before computing resources and lets you:

• Using the same classification of groups in all the works.

• Associate the family lot or supply suitable to each purchase.

• Attach each contract a predefined text.

• Find the most suitable suppliers for each contract.

The box should contain groups chapter concepts representing the desired type classifi-

cation by the user.

Associated supplies and suppliers, if any, should be as inferior concepts. The search for

groups corresponding to each supply is made by two alternative systems.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 153

On the supply code

The group of supply is the chapter that share more initials with the supply code, look-

ing in decreasing order of characters.

For example, for supply of code “P17AB01”, “P17AB01”, “P17AB0 “, “P17AB”, “P17a”,

“P17 “, “P1” and “P” are searched the chapters until it finds one.

In this case, the box should only contain chapters groups and suppliers.

By association of groups and supplies

In this case, the concepts of type chapter must have as inferiors the supplies that apply,

that must be work items or basic natures.

The supply code also is searched also by decreasing order of characters, so it is only

necessary to include the supplies needed based on the common initials. For example, if

all the ceramics bricks begin with “P10ML”, the purchasing groups need only the refer-

ence material “P10ML”.

If the box should contain supplies groups whose code matches that of a chapter, add an

underscore “_” after the code of supply; the program does not take into account in the

search.

Unlike the previous case, the group is not the same found concept, but its parent of

chapter type. This system is very flexible, because the coding system of the groups and

supplies can be completely independent.

Initial

It assigns a code group consisting of the initials of each supply code.

Basic concepts

It classifies the supplies by basic natures. If the group is registered as a concept, its de-

scription is displayed.

Calculate resources

This “PROCESS” menu option calculates the resources needed to execute the project.

This calculation is necessary to generate the contracts or for obtaining the number of

operators and equipment.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 154

Resources are all the project concepts, whether or not supplies, who have not concept

that is superior that be supply. Thus, the sum of amounts of all resources match the

total of the project.

Using a selection or masks, you can filter the concepts you want to calculate the re-

sources, from all the project to a chapter or set of work items.

The four criteria of calculation can be executed separately and their results are inde-

pendent, so it can be obtained, consulted and used four different sets of values.

Days, months and years

It calculates the daily necessary resources based on the data of the Gantt chart, distrib-

uting the estimate and target quantities linearly on the weekdays of each task.

Results by date

In the “Concepts” window, subordinate “Resources”.

In the “Diary” window, subordinate “Resources” with the layout related to days or

months. Values for months and years are the sum of their days.

By stages

Necessary resources for each stage or certification period. The quantities are taken

from the planned quantity in each stage, so there are only values for the target.

Results by stages

In the “Concepts” window layout “Manpower and equipment by stages” there is a drop-

down list to select multiple columns for resources in phases.

In the “Dates “ window, “Resources” subordinate, both with layouts concerned to stag-

es.

By activities

Required resources to execute each activity. The quantities are based on the activities

to the take-off lines are associated. They are calculated not disaggregated by dates,

which are not dependent on the status of activity on the Gantt chart.

Results by activities

In the “Activities” window, subordinate “Resources”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 155

Calculating equipment

This option deletes the existing values and populates the field in the manpower and

equipment concepts, dividing the total quantity of required hours in the stage by its

number of days and by the entered value in the “Duration of the workday in hours”

option.

Results

In the “Concepts” layout “Manpower and equipment by stages” window, choose

“QtyEquipment” drop-down list multiple fields.

Breakdown by stages with different types of grouping

By stages, grouped by

It calculates the resources disaggregated by stages, based on economic planning,

gathering the resources by various criteria.

The results are seen in “VIEW: Resources by groups”, containing layouts with different

levels of breakdown and sorting criteria.

First superior of the target type

Resources and the amounts for each destination and phase are obtained.

The concepts without top of type destination are assigned to the root concept.

Groups

It is the natural choice to generate contracts.

The concepts are grouped by the field content with purchasing group, with the condi-

tions described in “Groups”.

If a concept depends on several higher concepts belonging to different groups were

broken down into the necessary groups.

Suppliers

Concepts.Supplier

Filling in this field concepts, enables resource pools alternatively which is done with

groups.

Fields of the resources table

Resources.Code

Code of the activity concept.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 156

.Date

Date on which used.

.Group

Group that is used.

.DescriptionGroup

Summary of the group.

.NatGroup

Nature of the group.

.Stage

Stage where is used.

.QtyStocks

Quantity of the concept purchased and not consumed at the date.

.QtyEquipments

Number of equipment.

.QtyPendCont

Quantity pending of hiring.

.ContPend

Amount due to contract.

Results of the calculation of resources

Directory “03 Financial planning”:

Analysis of resources by months

This Excel template displays a detailed load histogram of the necessary resources, once

the resource calculation performed.

Contracting and purchasing

A contract is a grouping of similar supplies, that are executed or served by a same fami-

ly of suppliers. Contracts are used to request offers from suppliers, comparing the re-

sults, choose the most suitable awarded and provide the basis for managing the execu-

tion of the work.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 157

The contracts have the same properties of concepts, and are always characterized by

cost centers or destinations. Its behaviour is similar to other documents and supplies,

that in the case of contracts are their inferiors concepts.

Contracts can be created:

• Manually in the “Contracts” window, by entering the supplies in the correspond-

ing subordinated window, as well as text and other needed associated files.

• Manually marking chapters as “Contract” on its code or nature in the esti-

mates windows, provided they contain not cost centres in their inferior con-

cepts.

• Automatically using the procedure described below.

Create contracts

This “PROCESS” menu option previously requires the calculation of resources.

A contract for each group that appears in the “Resources by groups” window, which

may correspond to destinations, purchasing groups or suppliers is generated. You can

delete from this table the groups that do not want to convert into contracts, select

some groups or filter them using a mask.

Allows you to create, for each group:

• A single contract, with the quantity broken down by stages.

• A separate contract for each stage.

• A contract with the outstanding amount of hiring.

The contract code is formed with the purchasing group code and if that code already

exists, it add the prefix “_”, and existing forecasts contracts for the same groups are

eliminated, unless the option of pending quantities is selected.

The summary text of the contract and take the picture of selected groups, seeking

equivalence between codes.

Contracts are generated with the red state, so to calculate the contracted quantities

and amounts, you must to change the status to “Black” or “Green”.

In the estimate structure of chapters, with the “CON_” code containing the contracts

generated and facilitates its integration to the estimate, a chapter is created.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 158

Integration in the estimate

Contracts can be part or not of the structure of the estimate, if they have superior con-

cepts that link to the root concept.

If part of the structure, besides its own contract amounts, the same economic values for

other concepts are obtained.

If the contracts are part of the structure but do not want to join the estimate, you must set

field as null (the quantity or the price).

Contracts can fully match to the estimate chapters. Thus, subcontracted work items

match the certifiable and obtained directly all amounts necessary for economic moni-

toring.

Contracted quantity and price target

The quantity of each supply contract is the target quantity.

This amount can be segmented into phases and if introduced into the subordinate

window “Supplies” layout “Quantities phased” or when is generated automatically. If

you want to work with the quantities of supplies broken down into phases, it is neces-

sary that the contract is included in the structure of the work.

The contract target cost is obtained by applying to the total contracted quantity the

target unitary price for supplies.

Each stage contains the following fields:

Stages.QtyPlan

Quantity to contract in the stage, introduced directly or calculated based on the take-

off lines allocated to this planning stage.

.Plan

Amount corresponding to the last quantity, a price target.

.PlanEst

Contracted quantity, to the estimate price.

Find and associate supplier

By clicking the option on the “Contract” window allows you to select the right suppliers

for each contract, showing:

• All suppliers of the project, in light yellow.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 159

• Suppliers groups box corresponding to the contents of the field “Group” of the

contract or its lower concepts, as described in “Table groups”.

Suppliers can be filtered by ZIP code of the work.

The marked suppliers are associated to the contract by clicking “Accept”.

You can also manually associate suppliers, dragging the supplier from the window of

entities to the contract or supplies.

Remove bid

On the window header removed permanently supplies provider comparison. To remove

a supplier temporarily, without losing the prices offered, assign Color “Grey” in the

window of entities.

Concepts.NumSupp

This field contains the number of suppliers associated to the contract.

Request prices to suppliers

Contracts can be sent to suppliers to request tenders:

• In Presto or Excel format, with “FILE: Export: Price quote” option.

• Through reports or Word templates.

Export price request

This option generates a Presto project or an Excel workbook for each supplier that is

associated to contracts without awarding.

If it is a project, will contain a chapter for each contract in which the supplier is dis-

played, with the quantity to bid on each supply.

For an Excel workbook:

• A sheet or tab is created for each contract in which the supplier appears.

• Each sheet has the contract code, its name and text, the general data of the pro-

ject and the constructor data.

• It contains a concept for each supply, with the offered quantity and an empty

column for the price.

• All fields are protected (not password), except the price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 160

In both cases, the name of the generated files is the project plus the supplier code,

separated by an admiration. In addition, an email is created for each supplier whose

“Email” field is defined, with the corresponding attachments files.

The supplier must complete the unit price that proposes, clear the concepts does not

offer and return the same file.

Import price request

Sent requests can be imported with “FILE: Import: Bid”.

This option automatically populates the price offered by the supplier for each supply.

The supplies that have been deleted from the project or the Excel workbook are dis-

played with “NA” price.

In the message window possible incidents are indicated, as non-existing contracts or

supplies not enlisted in the contract.

Input the received data

Received bids are entered automatically as described in “Price quote”, or manually in

the fields associated to the supplier in the supplies window. The supplier code is in the

header field and the full name appears on the track help.

Prices.Price

Price offered by the supplier to this supply and this contract.

A supplier can only bid at all times to the same unitary price for each supply. However,

the price is saved with the contract while awarding, and the bid price may vary thereafter.

The “NA” (not available) value indicates a supply not offered; it can be introduced with

[Delete] key. The zero price means that the concept has not cost and is included in an-

other.

The amount is the bid price applied to the target quantity.

.Note

Specific comment for a supplier and a supply.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 161

Award and use of contracts

Compare contracts

Comparing contracts can be performed directly in the contracts window, where the

total amounts that can be compared with each other and with the target amount of

each contract.

You can also use the report “Comparative contract” or export the layout to Excel.

Concepts.BaseAvg

Contract amount considering in each supply the average price offered by suppliers.

.BaseMin

Theoretical minimum amount of the contract, taking in each supply the shortest of the

offered prices.

Compare the supplies of the contracts

They are seen in the subordinate contracts window called “Supplies”.

.SigmaCont

Normalized standard deviation (divided by the average price) of different bids of each

supply.

.AvgCont

Average unit price of the supply bids.

Relations.AmntMedCont

Supply amount to the average unit price.

Concepts.MinCont

Unit Price offered lower of the supply.

Relations.AmntMinCont

Amount of supply with the lowest offered price.

Award a contract to a supplier

The contract is awarded choosing the vendor code from those in the offer, using the

suggest button.

Also a contract is awarded with “Award” option on the header of any column of the

desired supplier, in the supplies subordinate window.

In awarding a contract to a supplier:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 162

• The offered price for each supply goes to “Price” field of the relationship be-

tween supply and contract, being fixed, but later the supplier bid this same sup-

ply to another price.

• The price is also copied to the “Cont” field of the concept, that contains the last

price at which it was contracted. This field will be replaced if it is subsequently

awarded the same supply to another price, by the same or another supplier.

Concepts.Supplier

In contracts, code of the chosen supplier in the contract award.

.Cont

This field contains the total contract amount to the prices offered by the supplier of

choice.

Relations.AmntCont

Amount of the contracted supply.

Update the target from the contracts supply prices

Skip contract price target

Choice of the “Contract” window, through which, once the supplier, copy the price of

supply in the “Concepts.Tgt” field, and the vendor code in the “Concepts.Supplier” field

awarded.

Creating documents of economic control from contracts

Transfer to order | Transfer to delivery order | Transfer to invoice

Since contracts can create orders, deliveries, invoices, provided that the tenderer is not

the type “Supplier (cumulative)”.

In the generated document, the “OriContract” field contains the contract code of origin.

If the contract quantity is not broken down by stages, the new document has the con-

tracted quantity less the ordered or delivered for each supply, as applicable.

Results of contracting and purchasing

If the contract is part of the estimate structure and are introduced appropriate quanti-

ties and prices, the results for contracts are the same as for any other concept are ob-

tained, as estimated production, earned value or the actual cost.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 163

If the contract structure matches the estimate can compare revenues, costs, certification

and values of economic management.

From award contracts may make a financial planning. Refer to “PROCESS: Create invoic-

es”, section of contracts.

Estimate windows

In the subordinate window “Prices”, “In contracts” layout, you can check the price for

each concept offered by each supplier.

Reports of the group “07 Procurement”:

Some reports take into account the status of contracts. For example, to print a firm

contract is not enough to award the tender to a supplier; further its status should be

“Black” or “Green”.

Price quote

It prepares a letter to each supplier, with the requested quantities of concepts to bid;

only you have to fill prices.

Comparative contracts

It compares the offered lots by different suppliers, and shows in green the cheapest

bids, the amount of the ideal bid, the average and the deviation from the expected es-

timate.

Firm contracts

It prepares a document with the main features of the successful tender.

Contracts and supplies

Contract disaggregated by supplies.

Contracted and ordered concepts

Control of deviations of quantities: planned, contracted and order.

Work items from a supplier

It displays the items relating to each supplier.

Resources by groups

List of resources grouped by group, previously calculated with the process options

“Calculate resources”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 164

Firm orders

Documents of orders to suppliers.

Production

Production is the project actually executed, valued at estimate prices. It represents the

collection right, which may or may not coincide with the certification, and is the basis

for calculating the actual cost of the cost centers.

The project actually executed is introduced in the same way as certification, either as a

lump sum of the work item, by stages or associating take-off lines. From this level of

detail dependent the production values that are obtained for tracking the project.

If the actual execution matches the certification, you can directly copy data between

fields of stages.

Copy certifications

This “PROCESS” menu option, copies the take-off lines, stages or lump sums from the

pricing structure chosen in “Origin” to the chosen in “Destination”, eliminating previ-

ously the pre-existing information.

It is a quick and easy way to get:

• Production, as a result of copying certification.

• The estimated certification as a result of copying the planning.

If the destination is planning, the lump sums are not copied.

Fields of production

Production can be obtained based on different quantities and at different levels of de-

tail.

The critical areas for monitoring the project, as estimated production and non-certified

production are obtained approval disaggregated states.

The indented indicate fields that are breakdowns of the above.

Fields Estimated production, based on the target

PlanEst Planned production until current stage.

TgtEst Estimated total production.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 165

Fields Estimated production, based on the target

Broken down by states of approval.

TgtEstIni Estimated total production contained in the

initial estimate.

TgtEstMod Estimated total production of the amended

estimate.

TgtEstPend Estimated total production pending of approv-

al.

Fields Real production

RealEst Real production until the current stage.

Broken down by states of certification.

RealCertEst * Executed and certified (firm) production.

RealNoCertEst * Executed and non-certified (pending) produc-

tion.

Broken down by approval states or risk levels.

RealNoCertEstIni Production in process contained in the initial

estimate.

RealNoCertEstMod

Production in process corresponding to the

modified.

RealNoCertEstPend

Production in proceedings pending of approv-

al.

* Calculated solely from take-off lines matching

Expression Margin or profit

RealEst - Real Real, to date.

PlanEst - Plan Estimated, until date.

TgtEst - Tgt Estimation, until the end of the project.

All these fields are obtained for the work items and the higher concepts as well as for

activities, phases and calendar.

They may have the prefix:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 166

• Qty, referring to quantities.

• Amnt, which refers to amounts.

• Without code, which are also typically amounts.

The most commonly used values on the diagrams of each production-related window.

Others can be found by selecting the column to the table and field.

For example, the production pending of approval and not certified, by days, months or

years, is:

Diary.RealNoCertEstPend

The amounts disaggregated by approval states provide very detailed results, which can

provide more information than the totals. For example, the overall difference between

production and certification:

RealEst - Cert

It does not let detect uncertified production if is offset by certification that is not in the

estimate.

The program also calculates the most significant percentages.

Campo Meaning Chapters (trades) Other items

PerProdEst Production over

estimate.

(RealEst * 100) / Est (QtyReal * 100) / QtyEst

PerProd Real advance on

overall production.

(RealEst * 100) / TgtEst (QtyReal * 100) / QtyTgt

You can get other percentages, deviations and comparisons using user fields or reports.

Portfolio: estimate pending of execute

This predefined expression shows the work pending of execute respect to the total tar-

get:

Relationes.AmntTgtEst - Relations.AmntRealEst

The pending work over the total possible estimate may be obtained from the expres-

sion:

Relations.AmntEstPossible - Relations.AmntRealEst

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 167

Invoices

The economic control system has two targets, one administrative and other analytical:

• The monitoring of invoicing, typing various documents, according to the de-

sired level of control, such as orders, deliveries, invoices and maturities.

• The cost analysis, integrated with document management.

Presto suits many different control procedures; is advisable to know the different possi-

bilities well before its implementation.

Project settings: Calculations: Consider only documents in approved stages

With this enabled option are not considered the purchases or the allocations on deliv-

eries or invoices after the current certification date.

Documents of the economic control

The invoicing process can be performed by orders, deliveries or invoices. The introduc-

tion of orders and deliveries is optional.

The common options to all three types of documents, which are introduced into the

windows “Orders”, “Deliveries” and “Invoices” are described in this section.

The “Work assignments” window has a similar behaviour described in “Analysis of costs

and expenses”.

The documents are broken down into supplies and can take a text and associated files.

Invoices can also have maturities.

Documents state

Documents in red and grey status are considered pending of approval and are not tak-

en into account in the calculations, except for the balance and cash flow.

The document status is chosen and indicates with its own color in the “Document”

and “Note” fields.

.State

Approval status of the document.

Required fields

To create a document you must enter at least the following:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 168

.Document

The code combination of document and entity must be unique for each year. If you are

exporting the documents to an accounting program, consider its specific conditions.

.Entity

Agent code that emits or receives the document. To the right appears the “Description”

field of the entity. Do not exists on work assignments.

This entity can be modified while any of the document supplies be associated to an-

other document.

.Date

Greyed if not considered in the calculation.

Other common fields

.Info

Indicates whether the document has supplies, text or associated files, as described in

“Use Interface: Layout: Columns of information fields”.

.BaseOrd | .BaseDel | .BaseInv | .BaseDest

Sum of the amounts of supplies of a document that are associated with documents of

each of the other types.

It detects easily the status of order, delivery, invoicing and consumption of supplies.

.Note

Brief summary of the document.

.DestinationDef

Document default destination.

.DefDescription

Summary of destination by default.

.OrContract

Contract of provenance of the document.

.Place

Location where the delivery of supply or service.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 169

.Payment

Days to pay.

.Bond

Percentage of guarantee.

.UsrNum

Numeric value that the user associates to the document.

.Issued

Type of document. 0: Received from suppliers, 1: Issued to customers.

.AccSupplier

Account counterpart of the document.

.Work

When an integration of linked projects is done, figure the project of origin of the in-

voice, provided that all the supplies are of a single project.

Common options to documents

The following options are also available in the subordinate window of supplies of each

document.

Transfer to order | Transfer to invoice

Create a document of the type indicated from the source document.

It can be enabled on a document, a supply or a selection of them. If it’s activated on

several documents at once, a single document for each supplier involved, with all the

supplies.

You can also create documents:

• Dragging a document from one type to the window of another.

• Writing a document code, which may or may not exist previously, in one of the

fields of a supply document.

Merge

It consolidates all supplies of the concept of each one of the selected documents, with

the total quantity and the weighted average price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 170

Copy the previous document

It copies the supplies of the previous document of the same supplier. It is especially

useful for creating invoices to origin.

Supplies

The documents are broken down into supplies, with concepts orders, delivered or in-

voiced.

In this section are described the common options to all types of documents, except

those corresponding to the analysis of costs, such as allocations to destinations and

projects.

Although not specifically marked, it becomes in a supply all indefinite concept that be

in a contract, order, delivery or receipted invoice.

Supplies.Code

Supplies may be added:

• Typing your code by copying and pasting or dragging the concept from the es-

timate windows and concepts.

• With the suggest button, which shows the most likely supplies, as already sup-

plied by the same supplier and of the same nature.

• Typing new codes that are not in the estimate.

The description and the unit of measure are the same of the concept in the estimate.

To rename a supply code, rename your code concept. This can be done in any of the

windows budget or concepts.

.Quantity

The suggest button shows useful values to fill the field, as the estimate and target

quantities, contracted, ordered, delivered and invoiced, for the document supplier and

also the totals.

If the quantity is zero, the unit price is taken directly as amount; this allows you to enter

additional costs of a supply that do not involve an increase in the quantity.

.Factor

Coefficient that affects the quantity of the supply.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 171

.QtyNet

Net quantity, product of quantity and factor.

.PerDiscount

Discount rate affects the price of supply.

.Price

Unit price of supply. The default price is the contract price or the target, in this order.

The suggest button shows useful values to populate the field, as estimate prices, target

and real, last, minimum and maximum contracted.

Although the price is displayed with rounding established for concepts of basic natures,

if more decimal places are entered, is saved and is operated without rounding.

.PrNet

Net price, resulting from applying the discount to the unit price.

.Amount

Product of the net price multiplied by the net amount.

.IVA

Percentage of tax applicable to the supply. Default applies the VAT associated to cus-

tomer or supplier.

.Note

Text for a specific supply.

.DateSched

Scheduled date of delivery of a supply.

.DateEnd

Completion expected date of delivery of the supply.

.DateProcurement

Purchase date of delivery, set on the date of delivery or invoice, and in that order.

.ProcurementOK

It has value 1 when the purchase document is on firm and the purchase date belongs

to the approved certifications.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 172

Relationship between documents

A same supply line can appear simultaneously in an order, in a delivery and in an in-

voice, and always will be of the same supplier. Thus, the tracking is very easy, since each

supply of a document, the other documents those belong it, is directly checked.

.Order | .Delivery | .Invoice

These fields show the other documents contained in the supply. You can also type a

document code, existing or not, to add the supply.

If a code is changed, the supply changes to the new document.

If the code is cleared, the supply is removed from the document, but if the full line of

supply is removed in a document window does not disappear from the other docu-

ments listed.

In addition, double-click these fields opens the corresponding window filtered for that

document.

Split

Unfold a supply to facilitate deliveries, invoices or fractional allocations.

Examples

The following case has been made an order, that it has been received and has been

completely invoiced:

Concept Quantity Order Delivery Invoice

Bricks 10.000 P-008 A005 08/2004

For that, the supply has to maintain the same quantity and the same price in the three

documents. If not, it should unfold as many times as necessary:

Concept Quantity Order Delivery Invoice

Bricks 3.000 P-008 A005 07/2004

Bricks 5.000 P-008 A006

Bricks 2.000 P-008

In this example we have received two deliveries of a larger order and are only invoiced

one of the deliveries.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 173

You can also create supplies in a order that are delivered and invoiced in other docu-

ments:

Concept Quantity Order Delivery Invoice

Bricks 10.000 008

Bricks 5.000 A005 08/2004

Bricks 5.000 A008 10/2004

It has been delivered and invoiced the entire order, as the total quantities matches, but

in two parts.

However, if a supply is separately on a delivery and an invoice, is considered to have

been purchased in duplicate:

Concept Quantity Order Delivery Invoice

Bricks 10.000 A005

Bricks 10.000 08/2004

In this case, 20,000 units were purchased. The part is delivered uninvoiced and invoiced

portion is undelivered.

Invoices

The invoice is the most comprehensive document for administrative control and cost

analysis.

Forecasts invoices are those with its “Net” status. This type of invoices is used for ex-

ample before starting the execution to analyse the financing by charges and forecasts

payments.

Invoices.Entity

The invoice type depends on the type of the associated entity:

Entity Invoice Color Utilization

Any Received White All kinds of purchases and expenses

Cumulative Received to source Orange Purchases to suppliers to origin

Promoter Issued Blue Collection of certifications

User Issued Blue Collects on sale of homes

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 174

The entity may change of type while only is associated to an invoice.

The invoices from customers, it is considered that the issuer is the entity defined as

“Builder” type.

When an invoice is created, the next values of the associated entity are taken by de-

fault, that are entered in the “Entities” window, “Invoicing” layout:

Field (*) Use It affects

WithldngWarrDef Warranty withholding Invoices

WithldngTaxDef Withholding tax Invoices

PerVAT VAT rate Supplies of invoice

DayPayment1 First payday Maturities

DayPayment2 Second payday Maturities

MethodPayment Mode of maturity Maturities

(*) Fields of “concepts” table

.WithldngWarr

Retention rate that applies to the supplier as guarantee.

There are two ways to execute this withholding, as described in “Maturities: Withhold-

ing”.

.WithldngTax

Percent retained to supplier against their taxes and to be paid to the tax authority.

.AmntWithldngWarr | .AmntWithldngTax

Amounts of warranty withholding and tax.

Those the warranty are accumulated in the address book fields and entities:

• “WithldngWarr” for received invoices.

• “WithlgCustomer” for invoices issued to customers.

The “WithldngWarr” field of the supplier accumulates only guarantees unpaid.

.IVA

Fee of the value added tax or equivalent tax, calculated on the rates applied to each

supply.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 175

.Amount

Invoice total amount, i.e., base plus VAT less tax.

The red color indicates a mismatch between the invoice and maturities:

• Withholding maturities do not match with the result of applying the percent-

ages displayed for the invoice.

• The sum of maturities does not match the total amount.

.Exp

It marks when exporting invoices to accounting programs. To re-export, unmark previ-

ously.

e-Invoice XML

This “Export” menu option creates an XML file in electronic format with the selected

invoices to be digitally signed.

Suppliers with totalling invoices

The invoices to suppliers of this type is taken into account only the last invoice from the

supplier. Not accept orders or deliveries.

• Each invoice must include the content of the previous.

• Each certification stage can have only one invoice for each supplier to origin.

Check “Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Records of economic control:

Copy previous document”.

.BaseInvOr

This field contains the basis to origin of an invoice from a cumulative supplier. It has

grey background in all invoices, except in the most recent of each supplier.

Maturities

Each invoice issued or received may be associated with an unlimited number of receipts

or payments, respectively.

The context menu over the maturities or invoices windows let creating automatically

the most common types of maturities, with the corresponding breakdown to the in-

voicing of the associated entity. If the maturities amount does not match its invoice, the

“Amount” field of the invoice is red.

The default maturity is that the payment method of the associate entity.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 176

The processes that create invoices automatically also create the default maturities, so that

previously defining the payment method of each entity is obtained together with the in-

voices the project calendar of receipts and payments.

Maturities can also be entered manually, by selecting the term of maturity from the

context menu.

State of maturities

Maturities can be defined as paid or unpaid by color or status with the contextual menu

on any field of maturity:

• Paid: Black or Green.

• Pending: Net or Grey.

These colors or states are in the “Note” field of the maturity.

Warranty withholding

It’s a non paid maturity that serves as warranty for the performance of a work or deliv-

ery of a material. In automatic maturities, the warranty withholding is returned one year

after the date of the received invoice.

Withholding can be applied in the invoices window with one of the following criteria:

Warranty withholding after VAT

Withholding is calculated on the base, and the VAT is paid in full on the date that cor-

responds to your settlement.

Warranty withholding before VAT

Withholding is calculated on the base, but the payment of VAT is deferred to a further

maturity when withholding is returned.

The “WithlgWarr” field of the invoice appears in grey.

Fields in maturities

Maturities.Date

You can set the date for each supplier maturity to one or two specific days of the

month. Indicated in the “Entities” window, “Invoicing” layout, in “DayPayment1” and

“DayPayment2” fields:

• In invoices received: entity defined as “Contractor”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 177

• In issued invoices: entity associated to the invoice.

.Type

It indicates the source of the amount of maturity, and may be invoice amounts, with-

holdings or taxes.

.Amount

Net color indicates that this is a payment, and black one a collect.

.Note

The suggest button shows the most common payment instruments.

.Bank

Financial institution associated to the payment method.

.PerPayment

Percentage of the maturity respect to the invoice total amount.

.Cashflow

Difference between receipts and payments for the period.

.OrCashflow

Accumulated cash flow since the beginning of the work to date, with its sign, which

represents the state of treasury.

The IRR internal rate of return of this cash flow, is contained in “Project settings: Miscel-

laneous” option.

Fields aggregated on invoices

Invoices.PaymentPaid

Sum of paid maturities (black or green).

.PaymentPend

Sum of maturities pending of payment (red or grey).

Results of the invoicing

The “CALCULATIONS: Documents” option totalling all amounts by item, suppliers and

dates from the invoice data.

The amounts can be seen in the windows for each element type and are in the fields

indicated in the following tables.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 178

Campo Amount in supplies, suppliers and dates

Contracts Contract

ContPend In contracts without assigned supplier

Orders In orders

Procurement In deliveries and invoices

Delivery orders In delivery documents

Invoices In invoices

InvCustomer In invoices to customers

Fields of amounts of documents

Campo Calculated amounts in suppliers and dates

IVA Input VAT

VATCustomer Output tax

WithldngTax Tax withholding deducted by supplier

WithldngTaxCustomer Tax deducted to customer

WithldngWarr Warranty withholding practiced by the supplier

WithldngWarrCustomer Warranty withholding practiced to the customer

Fields of taxes, withholdings and warranties

Campo Calculated amounts in suppliers and dates

Collection Collected maturities of customer invoices

CollectionPend Maturities pending of collect of invoices from customers

Payment Maturities payed to supplier

PaymentPend Maturities outstanding of payment by the supplier

Maturity amount fields

Campo For each concept

QtyContracts

QtyOrders

QtyDeliveries

QtyInvoices

Concept total quantity in each document

QtyProcurements Total quantity in deliveries or invoices

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 179

Campo For each concept

Contracts

Orders

Delivery orders

Invoices

Concept total amount in each document

Procurement Total amount in deliveries and invoices

Other results

Reports of the group “08 Invoicing”

Deviations of supplies by suppliers

Differences between the supplies of the selected documents ordered by supplier.

Used for example to detect if any supply has been ordered but not delivered.

Deviations supply

Same as above, but ordered by delivery code

Deliveries by dates

Deliveries totalled by month and filtered by dates and suppliers.

Deliveries by suppliers

Deliveries totalled by suppliers and filtered by dates and suppliers.

Invoices of subcontractors with take-off lines

Received invoices, planned or pending of approval, whose supplies are work items.

Invoices issued to customers

Issued invoices, planned or pending of approval, whose supplies are work items, with or

without take-off lines.

Invoices by suppliers

Invoices grouped by supplier, filtered and broken down by various criteria.

Invoices and maturities

Invoices received or issued totalled by months and filtered by dates, suppliers, or ap-

proval states.

Supplies by dates

It lets see the supplies between a certain date period, the previous period and later.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 180

Supplies totalized by suppliers

Supplies provided by each supplier in a period of dates.

Maturity for dates

Study of receipts and payments by date and statements of approval.

Centralized invoicing

To make the process of document management in a common way for a group of pro-

jects is necessary to create a central project as described in “Projects integration”,

where the general process of query and use, is described, and enlist the works linked.

The management or invoicing process is identical to that described for independent

projects, except that:

• The supplies allocations, plus of a destination, can be associated to one of the

linked projects.

• The concepts properties are unique by project, so that there cannot be discrep-

ancies between the central project and the linked ones.

• The calculation of actual costs for concepts that are consumed by target is not

calculated in the central work.

The cost analysis is performed on each project, though it may require information gen-

erated in the central project, as the real prices of supplies.

Share of the Information between the central and the projects

All documents upgrade options consolidate orders and deliveries of different works

with the same document code, supplier and date, as well as invoices, in this case, of the

same year.

There are three ways to enter information into the central project and on the linked

projects, that determine the options to be used in “Update documents” and “Export

documents”, of the “PROCESSES” menu.

1. Documents are introduced into the central project

No need to update information about the projects, unless you want to integrate previ-

ously existing projects.

You can export the documents to each project for viewing, exporting all “Delete exist-

ing documents” or “Only documents not previously exported”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 181

2 . Documents are introduced into the projects

To incorporate the central use the “Update documents” option.

You can create new documents in the central project, for example, to allocate common

expenses, or alter the received documents. In this case, to keep these changes, use the

“Only new documents” option.

3. Allocations are performed in the projects

Although the documents are introduced in the central, in the project is usually better to

know the destination of each consumption.

To do this, the documents can be exchanged between the central and the works using

the options “Read only allocations” and “Prior erased allocations respecting”that the

allegations of each supply read without altering any other information documents.

Update documents

This “PROCESS” menu option, updates the information in the central project that refers

exclusively to the documents of the linked projects.

Texts and associated files of awarded contracts and documents are also imported.

Read cost center allocations only

It assigns to the supplies the destinations that have in the allocations made in each

linked project.

Delete existing documents

It import the documents of each linked project, erasing previously those in the central

project.

Only new documents

It imports documents of each project, without altering the existing ones, even if they

were changed in the projects.

Consult at the central the contracts of the linked projects

The general data of contracts awarded for each work, are in the windows of estimate

sub window “Pricing of a work” layout “Contracts”.

Awarded contracts and their supplies are in the “Contracts” window. To see the origin

project of the contract, add to the layout the “Code2” column.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 182

The contracts codes must be unique for project

See in the central project, the documents of the linked projects

The general data of supplies and suppliers of each work, are in the windows of estimate

sub window “Pricing of a work”.

The documents, supplies, maturities and suppliers, managed and consulted on specific

main windows of this data, as if it were an isolated project. The only difference is that

documents and supplies include the “Work” field, which has the code of the linked pro-

ject to which it belongs. In the documents, is filled if all their supplies belong only to a

single project.

Export documents

This “PROCESS” menu option, updates the documents of the linked projects from the

information in the central project.

Delete existing documents, keep cost center allocations

It deletes the documents of each linked project but it maintains their allocations and

work assignments.

Delete existing documents

It replaces all existing documents in each linked project by that correspond to the cen-

tral project.

Only documents not previously exported

Exports to each project not export documents.

Results of centralized invoicing

Given the wealth of information that can accumulate in this type of management, re-

ports filters by dates, suppliers, etc., to get more specific results and adjusted to reality.

Reports of the group “10 Multiobra”

Purchasing, projects and suppliers

List of purchased supplies, broken down by manpower and supplier.

Works and costs center

List of works with cost centres and allocations received.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 183

Projects, suppliers and purchases

List of projects with suppliers involved, and the supplies purchased to each.

Analysis of costs and expenses

The same data entered in Presto for invoicing lets to analyse in detail the actual costs of

execution.

The cost calculation is based on two tasks:

• Enlist the production of each cost center, as described in “Production”.

• The allocation of consumptions, or allocation of supplies to their cost centers,

described in this section.

The actual unit cost of each cost center is the total amount of the allocations it receives

divided by its production.

In all cost analysis processes are considered only the supplies of approved stages, if the la-

belled option is enabled.

Destination

The concepts of which we want to know the real cost should be marked as targets or

cost centers.

The root concept is always a cost center and can also be work items, chapters, contracts

or concepts created expressly for this.

The difficulty of making a proper cost allocation increases geometrically with the number

of cost centers.

In addition to the manually defined, Presto assigns as destinations the undefined con-

cepts that receive allocations.

A cost center may be part of other cost centers. The only limitation of a cost center is

that it cannot be both a supply, i.e., be bought or contracted.

Expense and cost

The use or consumption of a supply in the execution of a cost center is identified by an

allocation.

This allocation has two distinct stages:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 184

• The time of purchase corresponds to expense, which is an accounting concept.

Presto allocate the expense in the date of the document and to the destination

of supply that is in the delivery or invoice.

• The time of the actual use of the resource in the execution corresponds to the

cost, which is an analytical concept. Presto allocates the cost on the date of ac-

tual use or consumption of supply.

The gap between expense and cost is essential to know the project status, as described

in the SIE (Financial Information System).

Consumption calculation types

Each concept can be associated with a method of calculating of consumption, which is

described below.

Concepts.TypeConsumption

The type is normally associated in windows budget and the concepts:

• 0: Consumption by target.

• 1: Consumption by allocation.

Cost Allocation

In deliveries and invoices

When a supply of a delivery or invoice is consumed at once and at the same destina-

tion, to generate the cost allocation only is needed entering its consumption date.

Supplies.Destination

Cost center code where the supply that is used, that must already exist. The suggest

button shows possible destinations, ordered by its probability.

The supplies destination which are calculated by target figure in grey, not taken into

account in cost allocations.

.DateInput

Date the supply is consumed or used. The dates that are not considered in the calcula-

tion are greyed.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 185

.InputOK

It has value 1 if the supply is a valid destination and date of attribution belongs to the

approved certifications.

If the consumer is being charged, the purchase must be firm.

If consumption by target, it must have a part of the work with destination and valid

date.

.Work

Work associated with the supply. Check “Presto at the stage of project: An information

system: Integration works”.

In parts of work

The work assignment is a document without issuing entity, that allows enlisting inputs

of supplies to their various destinations.

Fields with a different behaviour of the other documents are as follows.

Supplies.Quantity

The suggest button shows the amount of production. Introducing a percentage in the

next field can be allocated proportional consumptions to this value.

.Price

Shown in grey the actual unit cost obtained for the supply, which is used to obtain the

amount.

The use of the actual price on the work assignment avoids the need to evaluate each of

the supplies consumed. In addition, it independents the actual cost of each cost center

of the possible price differences in different deliveries of the same supplies.

To know the real cost of cost centres taking into account the specific purchase price of

each supply, refer the allocations of expenses.

Consumption by target

The resources whose consumption is relatively fixed per produced unit, as the materials,

can be associated to the type of calculation “Consumption by target”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 186

The unitary consumption of the concepts which are calculated by target is taken from

the yield listed in the target cost, avoiding making of allocations. It requires that exists a

breakdown of the work items.

Presto automatically generates the allocations corresponding to consumptions by tar-

get in a work assignment. This work assignment cannot be changed, since in each cal-

culation is generated again.

Concepts.QtyTotTheor

The concept total theoretical consumption is what should have been consumed in the

production function so far,i.e. the sum of the products of target unitary consumption in

each parent multiplied by the quantity produced from it.

Adjustment for purchases

In the supplies calculated by target may be a mismatch between two quantities:

• The difference between total purchases less stock.

• The theoretical consumption.

Concepts.CoefConsTeor

Suggest button calculates the ratio of the previous two quantities, providing that the

ratio can be optionally applied to the theoretical consumption to prevent this imbal-

ance.

If the coefficient is 0, it is considered that not purchases and thus not consumption, so

that the work assignment is not generated.

The coefficient is applied to calculate the theoretical and actual amounts, but is not

included in the theoretical quantities and neither in the work assignments.

In consumptions by target, the stocks must be entered manually, if this setting is desired.

If a concept of consumption by target simultaneously acts as certifiable work item and

as a component of others cost centers, the adjustment coefficient only is obtained and

is applied to the quantities corresponding to these last ones.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 187

Calculation of unitary consumptions

Relations.QtyReal

Consumption of certifiable items is equal to its production, regardless of the type as-

signed consumption, which only intervenes if the work item also contained in the de-

composition of another.

The unitary consumption of a concept by allocation in each of their superiors is the sum

of the allocated quantities thereto, divided by the total consumption of the superior.

Concepts by target unit consumption in any of their superiors is the indicated in its

decomposition, optionally set with purchases.

.QtyInput

This field contains the total quantity of the allocations between one concept and an-

other, without dividing by production.

In the subcontracted work items, this quantity corresponds to the subcontractor invoic-

ing, provided it have defined the destination, so you can compare the production with

the invoicing.

Concepts.QtyTotReal

Sum of amounts consumed of the concept in the entire work.

.QtyStocks

This field is contained in two tables:

• Concepts for total stocks of the concept.

• Resources for or annotate concept stocks staged. It’s as multiple field in the

window concepts.

Are in the “concepts” window, in the layout of adequate stocks depending on the type

of consumer you want to analyze.

Supplies consumed by allocation

Stocks are obtained as the difference between purchases and consumption, and in the

last approved certification.

They are seen at the “Stocks: Consumption by imputation” layout.

Supplies consumed by target

Stocks should be filled manually, if you want to apply the adjustment by purchases.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 188

They look in “Stocks: Consumption per target” layout.

Calculation of actual costs

When not actual data on prices or yields, because not purchases or allocations, the real

price of default is:

• For supplies, is the contracted or target.

• For work items without production, is obtained from their inferiors.

The estimated final cost matches with the target, at the beginning of the work, and the

actual final cost, to completion.

The actual costing calculation is performed whenever there is any document or contract.

Current cost of supplies

Concepts.Real

Relations.AmntReal

The real cost of supplies can have different origins:

Color How to calculate the real cost

Orange Weighted average price of purchases.

Grey If not purchase, is the price of the contract or target.

Net It comes from the import from another program.

In calculating the weighted average prices, if the quantity of a supply is zero, the

amount is added without increasing the quantity.

Real cost of the other concepts

The unitary actual cost of concepts that are not supplies is calculated from the bottom

to up based on the actual quantity and the actual unitary price of their inferiors.

Color Type

Blue Destination or cost center.

Magenta Undefined.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 189

Probable price

Concepts.TgtReal

Relations.AmntTgtReal

The likely price suggest the total cost more probable of any concept at the end of the

work.

The proper term for this value, according to the EVM Earned Value method is “EAC”

(Estimate At Completion), or estimated final cost.

In Presto different estimates are calculated as defined in the EVM, but also provides a

more accurate value in these fields.

For supplies, the price probably is the same as the real.

For cost centres with production, is the same as the real. When not production is calcu-

lated from the components, using as yields those of the target, corrected with the pro-

curement adjustment coefficient if it’s consumption by target concepts.

For certifiable work items, the probable quantity is the target one.

Notional amount

Relations.AmntTheorReal

It is calculated valuing the theoretical consumption of each concept, corresponding to

the current production, to the actual cost.

In the concepts calculated by target is equal to the actual amount, but which are calcu-

lated by allocation, gives an idea of the deviation due solely to yields.

Other fields relating to the calculation of actual costs

Campo Meaning Table

QtyReal Unitary real consumption or production. Relations

QtyTotReal Consumed total quantity. Concepts

QtyTotTheor Theoretical total quantity depending on the target and

production.

Concepts

Real Unitary real cost. Concepts

dates

AmntReal Consumed amount of a concept in another. Relations

TotReal Consumed total amount. Concepts

dates

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 190

Campo Meaning Table

TgtReal Final unitary cost most likely of the concept. Concepts

AmntTgtReal Most likely final cost of the relation. Relations

Input Total charged to a concept in another in a stage. Stages

QtyInput Total quantity allocated to a concept in another. Relations,

stages

Allocations of expenses

Campo Meaning Table

Orders Allocations to the concept in orders. Concepts phases

Delivery orders Allocations to the concept in deliveries. Concepts phases

Invoices Allocations to the concept in invoices. Concepts phases

Procurement Allocations to the concept in deliveries and invoices. Concepts phases

Export invoices

“PLUGINS” menu option that generates a text file with the data of all bills whose “Exp”

is not marked, and mark the field. The data are separated by tabs.

• Exported only firm invoices.

• Cumulative suppliers supplies are not exported.

• The highlighted fields are exported only with the “Winconta” option enabled.

• Invoices considering the counterparts of the work, supplier, invoice or concept

supplied are distributed.

• The% VAT document appears only if all supplies of the bill are the same; Figure

0 otherwise but the quota is filled.

Document Key Fields

Invoices G Nº de factura | Supplier | Date | Type E: Emitido / R: Received | Base | %IVA | %Retención

fiscal | %Retención garantía | Cuota IVA | Cuota fiscal | Cuota garantía | Amount | Divisa |

Type de retención de garantía 0: Después 1: Antes | Work | Pending pago | Pagado| Note

| DestinoDef | CtaProveedores

Supplies J Code|Unit|Description|QtyNet|PrNet|Amount|Invoice|Supplier|Destination|Work|Allocation

date|% VAT|Note|Price%|Discount|AccSuppliers

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 191

Document Key Fields

Maturities V Date| Amount | State P: Paid / E: Pending | Type N: Regular / RG: Warranty withholding /

RF: withholding tax | Note | Invoice | Supplier

Suppliers S Code | Name | NIF | Address | Telephone | Title | Contact | Note | City | Province | Post-

alCode | Email | Fax | AccSuppliers

Variables D [Variable Name | Value | Description]

Results of the analysis of costs and expenses

Reports of the group “09 Cost Analysis”:

Allocations to cost centers

List of destinations and allocations received by each.

Allocations of consumptions

List of supplies consumed, with the destinations where are allocated.

Production by work items

For each stage or month, shows the planned quantities, certified and produced in each

work item, totalling the amounts by stages.

Production by chapters

Description of planning-certification-production to date.

Stocks valuation

List of concepts with the quantities not allocated or existing in the stock, valued at the

actual price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 192

Menus and options This chapter breaks down the location of the different menu options, but usually are

detailed and explained in the process where they are used.

File

New

It creates a new project, which is a file with the extension “.PrestoObra” or “.po10”, on

the indicated path.

When creating a new project without template, may require some revision of data as

the summary, name and value of some taxes, currencies or any other characteristic val-

ue of the project.

Template

Templates are Presto projects that serve as model for new projects, avoiding entering

repetitive data each time it is created.

The new project is a copy of the chosen template, with all their data and properties. In

it, the user can delete and add the chapters that require to adequate the project to the

habitual project. You can also add new or delete existing templates.

They are located in the templates directory, and are supplied several with different clas-

sifications, typology of projects and in several languages.

Check “FILE: Working environment: Directories”.

Open

It opens a project, a report or a CAD file, according to the window from which is exe-

cuted. The projects can also be opened from “FILE: Projects” and from “REFERENCES”.

If Presto runs by the first time, the “. PrestoObra “ extension is associated to the pro-

gram, allowing open a project or import the file with double-click in Windows Explorer.

Depending on the Windows version, so this association is made may be necessary to

run the program at least once as administrator.

They can be opened simultaneously up to five projects. Each, displays in the window

header the opening order between brackets.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 193

Presto works can be opened:

• Directly, to read and write by a single user.

• Directly, read-only mode by multiple users.

• If the project is located in an http server on the Internet, typing or pasting the

link in the dialog box “Open”. Opened in read-only mode.

• Through Presto Server, to be edited by multiple users simultaneously. Refer to

“Setup guide” specific options “Presto Server”.

• You can also open a project dragging to an icon or Presto window.

Projects on standard exchange format, of extension “.BC3”, can also be imported with

“FILE: Import: BC3”.

If the project is password protected, the program will ask beforehand. Some projects with

password can only be opened from a particular Presto license.

Open as read-only file

This option of “Open” dialog box opens the projects that are to be used only in read

mode, to prevent inadvertent modification.

The projects in read-only are opened much faster.

In the header of the window appears the message “(read-only)” and all columns have

the yellow background.

A project is automatically opened in read-only mode:

• When the project is open by another user in read-only mode.

• If the file, directory or media does not have write permission.

The works that are in the list of recent works, the end of the “FILE” menu, open in the

same way of reading and writing which opened last time. To open it in another way, it

should be done from the dialog box.

A work with an asterisk at the beginning of the route indicates that opened in read-

only mode.

Projects

It catalogues, manages and administers projects. Directories and hidden files are not

shown. The context menu options act on:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 194

• The directories, in the left frame.

• The selected projects in the right frame.

Operate with directories

Create | Delete | Rename | Update

It lets performing these operations with directories.

Working directories

It is an alternative of this window to equivalent options of “FILE: Working environment:

Directories”.

Presto Server directories

Options permissions and user access. Refer to “Setup guide” specific options “Presto

Server”.

Operate with projects

The “Projects” window displays the following types of projects.

Icon Extension Mode

PrestoObra Closed

PrestoObra Open in exclusive mode

PrestoObra Open in shared mode

The works in read-only mode appear with yellow background color.

Open | Close | Cut | Copy | Paste | Delete | Rename

Perform the operations with the works. Refer to “Setup guide” specific options “Presto

Server”.

Open as read-only

It opens a project that is to be used only in read-only mode, faster than reading and

writing.

Check integrity

It checks the relational integrity of tables, regenerates and recalculates the contents of

field “Info”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 195

Read-only mode | Read-write mode

It assigns attributes of read or read and write access to a work. It equals to the same

operating system options.

Find in subfolders

It searches projects recursively in all subdirectories of the selected directory. It’s auto-

matically disabled to avoid long waiting times.

Close, save and print windows

Close

Close the book, report or the CAD file without closing the program. A work is also

closed when you close the last open window. Refer to “Setup guide” specific options

“Presto Server”.

Save

Saves changes made to the text. Refer to “Setup guide” specific options “Presto Server”.

When you open a file in write mode “.PrestoObra” is created in the same directory a file

with the “.PrestoRestore” extension, which will add information to the changes that are

introduced in the work.If the work is closed correctly this file is deleted. In another case,

to reopen the work Presto recovered from this file information is lost.

To ensure the information security, when the project is saved, Presto carries out the

following process:

• The work is copied to a temporary file “.PrestoSave”.

• If the backup completes successfully, the project file is renamed as “.PrestoBak”

and “. PrestoSave” is renamed as “.PrestoObra”.

• If “.PrestoSave” file is not generated, “.PrestoObra” and “.PrestoRestore” still ex-

ist, so Presto can recover lost information.

To restore the previous state of a project change the file extension “.PrestoBak” with

“PrestoObra”.

Save as

In single-user mode, it saves the work under another name or directory.

Printer setup

It lets selecting the printer, the size and orientation.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 196

Preview

It prints the contents of the active window. The margins are indicated in “Working envi-

ronment: Margins”.

Touch screen

This changes the display of options and icons optimized for high-resolution devices,

allowing you to choose between small, medium and large.

Exit

Close the project and the program.

Import

BC3

See “Link with other programs: Exchange of estimates”.

Excel | Access

See “Link to Excel and Access”.

Allplan

Check “Presto at the stage of project: Integration to BIM”.

Bids | Prices

Check “Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Comparison of multiple

prices”.

Take-off lines

Check “Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Importing take-off lines”.

Price quote

Check “Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and pur-

chasing”.

Primavera

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Primavera and Project Link “.

User profile

Refer to “FILE: Working environment”.

Schema layout

Refer to “Use Interface: Layout”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 197

Documents

It imports of another project all documents of the same type. It does not import or

modify existing documents with same code, entity and date.

It imports also the suppliers and concepts that are in the imported documents and that

are not in the project previously.

Export

BC3

See “Link with other programs: Exchange of estimates”.

Excel | Access

See “Link to Excel and Access”.

Allplan catalogue

Check “Presto in the design stage: BIM Integration: Integration between Presto and

Allplan”.

Revit catalogue

Consultar el manual de "Cost-It", que está en el apartado BIM de www.rib-software.2-

inglés

Microsoft Project

Primavera XML

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Primavera and Project Link “.

Price quote

Check “Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and pur-

chasing”.

ContaPlus

Logic Class

See “Link with other programs: Accounting: Logic Class and ContaPlus”.

e-Invoice XML

Check “Presto for contractors: Invoicing: Invoices”.

User profile

Refer to “FILE: Working environment”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 198

Working environment

It defines the status of the work habits of a user, common to all his projects, part of the

user profile.

The user profile contains the configuration of the working environment, including:

• The status of all options “FILES: Working environment”.

• Filters, expressions and user fields, that can be saved and edited in the “Expres-

sion builder”.

• Other customizable properties that are maintained between work sessions.

• The activations of Presto modules.

Each user on the same computer has its own user profile that is stored in the “Pres-

toNNN.PrestoPerfilXml” file, where NNN digits version. The file is in XML format.

The file is automatically saved each time you exit of Presto, in the configuration directo-

ry.

Seen in “FILE: Working environment: Directories: Configuration”, such as:

C:\Users\MyUser\AppData\Roaming\Presto

This directory is usually hidden; to view the option must be on the Windows file explor-

er to display hidden files and directories. You can also locate the command%

APPDATA%

When Presto is installed as workstation or an user executes Presto without an user pro-

file, the program creates a default profile, with a standard configuration.

User profile

To use or save the common uses and customs, you can import and export the profile. A

profile can be distributed to other users, greatly reducing the implementation times.

To switch layouts configuration see “Use interface: Layouts: Customize layouts”.

To restore the default user profile, delete the profile file of the configuration directory.

Loading sequence settings:

1. Initialization

When starting Presto, takes the default configuration, and performs a sequential search

of configuration files that can exist in different directories.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 199

If you find these files in any of the steps, the process terminates, and otherwise contin-

ue to the next step.

2. User files, in the configuration directory

(PrestoNNN.PrestoPerfilXml)

The first time you boot Presto does not exist, and is created with the original values

once Presto closes.

On next occasions it boots Presto, it looks for this file and if it exists, load full profile.

3. Administrator file, in the application directory

(Presto.PrestoPerfilXml)

If it exists, load full profile.

4. Location file in the “Data” directory of each location

(Presto.PrestoPerfilXml)

If it exists, load the configuration of windows, defined expressions and filters.

FILE: Export: User profile

It lets saving manually the profile or any of theirs components, such as user fields. So

you can choose from several profiles, retrieve from another computer or transfer com-

ponents of the profile to another computer.

FILE: Import: User profile

It replaces the active profile fully or partially by another. If importing, expressions are

detected with the same name, the new ones are renamed. To fully charge the profile,

close Presto and reopen it.

General

Automatic fit of columns width

Sets width of table columns to their contents. Equivalent to the icon “Fit column width”.

Automatic price recalculation

This option activates the work mode in which most of the calculations are performed

on the fly, avoiding press constantly the calculation option.

To recalculate the values, execute “CALCULATIONS: Calculate all” or activate the option

again.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 200

To expedite the work on large construction sites, or in the calculation of some fields of

concepts, it is desirable to disable this option.

Fields of concepts that can slow down calculations, have grey background when this

option is disabled, and are:

Fields Property

QtyTot * Quantities in each pricing structure

Tot* Total amounts in each pricing structure

QtyContracts

QtyOrders

QtyDeliveries

QtyInvoices

Total quantities for each type of document

NumInf

NumSup

Number of superiors

Number of inferiors

Tree level Hierarchy level

* Add the prefix of each price structure

Accept lowercase concept codes

If disabled, to introduce codes of concepts, institutions and documents in tables and

dialogs the program converted to uppercase. Masks are not altered.

Show data from header concept

It lets the information of subordinate windows of “Estimate” window, as text or take-off,

corresponds to:

• The concept where the cursor is.

• The concept of header.

The chosen concept is called active concept.

Use the “.po10” instead of “.PrestoObra”

Select one or another extension.

Block estimate alteration

It prevents alteration of data relating to the estimate, as the quantities and prices. It

also affects the changes in approbation states of the take-off lines which involve the

(red) pending state.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 201

It affects all tools and processes related to the estimate, so it should be taken into ac-

count in perform global operations.

Lock editing of approved certifications

It’s a help that prevents data in the take-off lines and assigned stages to approved cer-

tifications are altered, including planning and real execution. It is useful to prevent acci-

dental modification of this type of data, but does not prevent other changes affecting

the overall result of the certification, such as modifying or deleting concepts prices.

It affects all program processes, which should be taken into account when performing

operations as operating, duplicating, importing, updating, or any other user process

that alters the mentioned data.

Use field names and variables in English

It adapts the interface to English. See “Language for the program”.

Location

It adapts files used in Presto with the selected location, among which are the works of

example, references, templates, reports and supplements. It is independent of language

for the program and work.

Interface language

Affects the fields, options and program menus.

Fields are available in some languages, using English as an international language.

To print reports in a language, it exists the following alternatives:

• Printing reports designed in a particular language, which is included by default

in the directory for each location. You can also choose the reports directory in

the “Working environment” or “Projects” window.

• Print reports designed in multilanguage. In this case, the texts for the language

selected for the program are printed.

The numerical value of the language contained in the general variable “_Language”.

To translate the program options to another language, refer to “FILE: Translate inter-

face”.

To translate the reports text strings into another language, refer to “FILE: Translate re-

port”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 202

The project language is independent of the used in the program, and appears in “VIEW:

Project settings: Miscellaneous”.

Google key for translation

See “Use Interface: Windows text: Translate texts”.

Appearance

It modifies some colors and text types used by the program.

Other features of appearance are modified by changing the display properties of the

operating system.

In Windows 8 and 10 is configured from the “Control Panel: Appearance and Personali-

zation: Screen”.

You can choose to change a percentage globally affecting all elements, or change some

with the option:

Change only the text size

Property In Presto affects to

Title bars Title of the main windows.

Menus Menus and options, including the tracks.

Name of tabs.

Title of subordinate windows.

Layouts dropdown lists, multiple fields of stages, stage numbers,

etc.

Message boxes Emerging messages.

Icons Options showing the directory structure

Themes

It lets selecting various styles and colors for windows, except the program itself, that

use the defined layout and in the operating system screen configuration.

Font

Font of the table windows.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 203

Background or foreground color

Colors assigned to each field type and value. If a field is empty, the background takes

the color chosen for the text.

Directories

System directories

Configuration

Directory assigned by the operating system, independent for each computer user.

User profile and license activation files are stored.

Temp

Directory assigned by the operating system, where intermediate files are generated for

internal use.

User directories

User

General directory for Presto documents not specified in other options. It is used for

example as a destination directory and origin of exports and imports respectively.

You can also define in the “FILE: Projects” window.

Projects

Default directory for opening and saving projects.

You can also define in the “FILE: Projects” window.

During the installation process, the examples to this directory are copied, which also

projects include files in other formats to make different processes.

Reports and templates [User]

Default directory for the destination of reports generated automatically. You can in-

clude in this directory the desired reports, and will appear on “REPORTS” menu options.

Plugins [User]

Directory to include the plugins that the user wants, and appears in the options of

“PLUGINS” menu.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 204

Directory of the components by geographical location

Export layout to Excel

Default directory where files are Excel. Consult the section on export windows Presto in

“Link with Excel and Access”.

Reference

Directory where are catalogues, charts and development aid estimate, which can be

used as references to copy data from them to other estimates. They look at the

“REFERENCES: References” menu.

You can also define in the “FILE: Projects” window.

Plugins

Directory where programs or plugins of “PLUGINS” menu are.

Reports and templates

Default directory where reports and templates are in the “REPORTS” menu are.

You can also define in the “FILE: Projects” window.

Templates work and reports

Default directory where models of works and reports are.

When creating a new project, projects appears of this directory to choose one of them

as a model.

When creating a new report or an automatic one, a copy of which appears with the

name “Template” is created in that directory.

You can delete, add or modify any of these files to suit their common uses.

Databases

Location of reference projects used by Presto options.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 205

Work Utilization

Prices Used by wizards to update information generated estimates and other pro-

gram options.

Groups It is used to represent different classifications, for example:

• Lots or purchasing families and associated suppliers.

• Activities.

• Spaces.

User can design any classification criteria.

This table is used to suggest or fill values in the “Group” field.

Specifications See “Technical Specifications”.

Formulas

The take-off lines formulas used are saved with each line; subsequently modified in this

table does not affect them.

Margins

Margins used in printing reports.

Restrictions

There are several types of Presto use restrictions:

• Customizing the interface, described in this section.

• Restricting access to a project, as described in “Project settings: Security”.

• Restrictions affecting a user to all their works, as described in “User restrictions”.

• Access to works and users’ permissions. Refer to “Setup guide”, the “Presto

Server” specific options.

Customizing menus

You can reduce the number of program options visible to each user, to simplify the use

or limit their access to projects.

The list of “Active menus” lets you limit the menus and the program visible options. You

can remove any option from the main menu and their submenus, besoin their access

icons, plus access to the “Working environment” and “Project settings” dialog boxes.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 206

Only activate options from authorized modules

It lets deactivate the visibility of icons and options assigned to modules not availa-

ble or disabled.

If you delete the access to configuration options, previously set them as you wish. Re-

stricting the access to certain program options may very well define the use by different

users. For example, to prevent a user from changing Presto modules he has access, re-

move the access to “HELP: Activation” option.

So that the user cannot change his menus customization is necessary that the system of

restrictions is enabled.

Refer to “Appendix I. Technical Documentation: User Restrictions”.

Access to reports, wizards and add-ins

You can choose the wizards, reports and plugins that appear in their respective menus,

eliminating the corresponding files of their directories or even the complete options.

Note that the user can access the wizards, reports and plugins located in his user direc-

tory. If you deactivate “REPORTS: Design report” option, the user will can use the re-

ports, but not modify them. You can protect a report to be used, but not modified,

even if you have access to the design option.

Access to layouts

If you do not want to go to a schema, remove all fields except one. See “Use Interface

layouts: Customize layouts”.

PrestoServer

Configuration options for multiuser environments.

Refer to the corresponding section in the “Setup Guide”.

Translate interface

You have several options that allow:

• Translate menus and options Presto to other than the original language.

• Add translations to Presto.

You can perform automatic translation using the resources of Google. If you do not

have them or language is not supported by this service, the translation can be done

manually.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 207

Generate RTF

It generates an RTF file that serves as the basis for the translation of Presto to the se-

lected language.

You can use Google Translate if you have the proper key.

See “Use Interface: Windows text: Translate texts”.

You can add a check column to the RTF file, which allows you to check if the reverse

translation matches the original.

Source language

It let choosing the language from which the translation is to be performed.

Language name

If the destination language is “<New>“, should fill the cell to indicate the language

name that will be translated.

Include LNG file

It includes “MSG_LNG_FILE” column in the RTF file, whose contents are the messages of

the file specified language.

Convert RTF to LNG

From the translation in the RTF file, generates a valid file Presto LNG language. This file

must be copied into the subdirectory “Data” in the installation directory.

Loading the LNG file in Presto

If the file does not contain a translation to a language of a particular message, it will

look for the translation between the languages in this order:

File Original language Alternative language

Portuguese (BRA) Portuguese

Presto5.lng Portuguese Galician

Presto4.lng

Presto1.lng

Galician

Catalan

Euskera

Spanish

Presto6.lng

Presto3.lng

Deutsch

French

English

Presto2.lng English Spanish

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 208

So, partial translations can be made, for example to translate only the portion of esti-

mates and take-off lines.

EDITION

Editing operations using the usual Windows conventions and are described in detail in

the chapter “Use interface”.

Undo | Special undo | Redo

See “Use Interface: Edit: Undo | Redo”.

Cut | Copy | Paste | Delete | Move

Refer to “Use Interface: Edit”.

Select All | Invert Selection | Deselect

Refer to “Use Interface: Edit”.

Find | Replace

Refer to “Use Interface: Edit”.

First element | Previous | Next | Last element

Refer to “Use Interface: Windows”.

Export layout to Excel

See “Link to Excel and Access”.

Restore schema

Fit column width

Refer to “Use Interface: Layout”.

Filter by expression | Filter by words | Cancel filters

Refer to “Use interface: Filter elements”.

VIEW

This menu gives access to most of the main windows.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 209

Project settings

Common to all the work data in “Presto at the stage of project: An information system:

Data and general properties of the work.” And other specific sections

Also seen in the “VIEW: Variables” window, “Common” layout.

Data

General fields belonging to the root concept of the work.

Miscellaneous

Fields not classified in others categories.

Currencies

Check “Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Currencies”.

Roundings

Number of decimal places to which values are rounded in calculations.

Calculation

Calculation options and percentages applied to the project.

Planning

Key dates of the work and other data involved in calculating durations. Check “Presto in

the planning stage: Temporary Planning “.

Accounting

Data relating to indirect taxes and export to accounting programs, described in “Ex-

porting to accounting”.

Security

It lets protect the access to a project with a password.

Password Functioning

With The password is valid from the time the work is saved.

Sin Remove the password of the project, if any.

Change password for the project

It lets enter or change the password for the current work.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 210

License

To protect a work so you can only open a specific user license, enter the license number

of the user, who can read “FAQ: Activation” program here.

Read password for the previous license

It allows access to this work exclusively for the specified user license, and in read-only

mode.

Tables

In this window are the tables and records containing the work.

You can delete an entire table by selecting it and pressing to remove. The tables in grey

cannot be deleted, because they have required data in other tables. For example, you

cannot delete documents while supplies.

Tree

This window and the “Estimate” one are the usual working windows.

The process of creating the estimate described in “Presto at the stage of project: Esti-

mate”.

This window is hierarchical, so to the behaviour of the table windows adds special fea-

tures described in “Use interface: Windows: Hierarchical windows”.

Layouts

The drawings are in the approximate order of estimate development, from design to

execution of the work.

In general, there are two large groups of layouts:

• Concerning to estimates and activities (stages icon off).

• Relating to certifications and stages (stages icon enabled).

Some layouts do not belong to one and other, and show a different structure, without

stages icon, or without multiple fields.

Number of activity or stage

The drop-down list lets you choose the number of activity or initial stage, depending

on your chosen layout (estimate or certification, respectively), which takes into account

in the viewing of the multiple fields.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 211

Dynamic fields

Drop-down lists with fields for activities or stages, depending on the type of chosen

layout. They display information from the selected activity number or stage.

A same multiple field has different content for the same number of stage or activity,

depending on the selected layout.

Example: Activity or stage number “1” field “Cert”.

Types

of layout

Data origin Column content

Estimate

“Activities” subordi-

nated

Concept amount certified corresponding for

activity # 1.

Certification

Subordinated “Stages” Amount certified of the concept in the certi-

fication or phase # 1.

When a user field is chosen as one of multiple fields, user field data are obtained de-

pending on the type of layout:

• Estimate: From user columns defined in the “Activities” subordinate window,

“Estimate” layout.

• Certification: From user defined columns in the subordinate window “Stages”,

“Certification” layout.

Layouts of estimations and activities

Summary

Concept code and description, with icons that indicate the types of associated infor-

mation.

Estimate

Minimum information necessary to draft the estimate.

BIM data

Information mostly from BIM models.

Help for measurement

Useful information during the course of the take-off lines, as described in “Take-off

lines”

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 212

• The category allows you to check the measurements, as shown in the wizard

“Categorizing”.

• Calculated values of the work item can be used in the take-off lines of other

work items.

• Headers of the take-off lines and assigned formulas.

Comparison of prices | Bids

The systems of comparison are described in:

“Project management: comparison of bids”.

“Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Comparison of multiple prices”.

Other prices of estimate

Complementary field to the basic data:

• The date and the IPC, which will operate the price. The suggest button shows al-

ternatives to adjust the price.

• Prices in other unit of measurement are described in “Budget: Other fields of

concepts”.

Estimate by basic elements

Amount of each concept broken down by natures. To see a breakdown of other pricing

structures, add the desired columns.

Estimate by hours

It displays the most important values of resources of manpower and equipment, ac-

cording to the estimate.

Estimate by currencies

Budget prices and amounts for foreign exchange.

Estimate by statuses

Estimate amount with full breakdown by approval states of the take-off lines.

Estimate and target

Comparative study between the sales estimate and the cost estimation.

The application of cost overrun general percentages make differences between groups

of amounts, described in paragraphs “Estimate” and “Economic planning”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 213

Layouts of certifications and stages

Planning

Breakdown by stages or certifications of the cost target.

Resources and procurement groups

Concepts with information relating to their hiring.

Certification

Current and cumulative certification data, compared to the estimate.

If you do not wish certify with take-off lines, certification can be entered in this window:

• Directly at each stage, in multiple fields to the right as “QtyCert” or “PerCertEst”,

of the “Stages” table.

• Globally for the work item, entering the “QtyCert” quantity or the certified per-

centage “PerCertEst” of the “Relations” table.

• Globally for the chapter, with its percentage “PerCertEst” of the “Relations” ta-

ble. This percentage is passed on all their work items that have not take-off lines

or quantities in certification stages.

Certification by statuses

It displays the certified part of each state of the estimate.

Each certification status contains the part of the certification corresponding to each

state of the estimate, so full certification is the sum of the states.

You can add to the layout the predefined default user “PerCertEstPossible” that indicate

the certified percentage over the possible estimate.

EVM Earned Value PM

Data used to determine the progress and expected final status of the work from the

information normally know the address of the work.

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto, under “Certifications”.

Incomes and expenditures

Amounts provided for certification and planning respectively. May be seen globally or

by month.

Production

Data used to determine the production.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 214

All are valued at estimate price, so you can directly compare.

If exists some part not certified without production, it’s possible obtain as the differ-

ence between certification and certified production.

Cost control

Data required for knowing actual costs and deviations.

For only the deviation in cost, the actual cost of each concept should be compared with

the estimated cost of the part executed so far (“earned value”), i. . “RealTgt” and “Real”.

Data for the concepts show the unit cost and relations are the total cost, but the devia-

tion is the same.

The amount allocated shows the sum of allocations of the concept in their destinations,

calculated basis on supply prices, and is an alternative to the actual cost, based on the

weighted average price.

EVM Earned Value

Data used to determine the progress and expected final status of the work from the

information normally known construction company.

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto, “Recruitment and Ordering, invoic-

ing and control” section.

SIE Production and Cost

It lets economic monitoring of the project for months, showing the amounts of the

most relevant data to deduct gaps between the certification and production, and be-

tween expense and cost.

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto, “Recruitment and Ordering, invoic-

ing and control” section.

Projects integration

Allows you to manage estimates and works seamlessly. Check “Presto at the stage of

project: An information system: Integration works.”

Subordinate windows

Text

Main text of the concept, which is printed in the estimate. You can associate other text

files from the thumbnail window.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 215

Activities

Quantities and amounts broken down by activities. Check “VIEW: Activities and certifi-

cations”.

Stages

Quantities and amounts of different pricing structures, disaggregated certifications.

Check ‘Show: Activities and certifications “.

Stages and activities

Take-off lines associated to the relationship between the concept and its superior. Refer

to “VIEW: Take-off lines”.

Thumbnails

Files associated with the concept. Check “Presto at the stage of project: An information

system: Additional Project Files”.

Children

List of inferior concepts.

Keywords

List of keywords or parameters associated to the concept, with the operation described

in “VIEW: Keywords”.

Diary

Prices of a work

Concepts that have prices in a linked project or in an entity pricing.

Check “Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Integration of works: In

the center of the linked data works “and”VIEW: Prices”.

Prices

Prices concept works on the linked entities or pricing. See “Presto at the stage of pro-

ject: An information system: Integration of works: In the center of the linked data

works” and “SEE: Prices”.

Estimate

The layouts, the subordinate windows and the use are equal to “Tree” window, exclud-

ing about hierarchical windows.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 216

Link to tree window

The icon is located in the upper left of the window. Helps the active concept in this

window automatically adapts to the chosen in the “Tree” window, which can be open

simultaneously. Refer to “FILE: Working environment: General: For details of the con-

cept of header”.

Parametrics

Generate concepts derived from parametric. In all other concepts, showing its text and

its lower concepts.

Automatically opens when you double click on the windows of the estimate over a par-

ametric concept.

To insert in the estimate the concept derived from the marked combination use “Copy”

icon and use “Paste” in the place of destination.

Subordinate windows

Children

Decomposition of the derived concept from a parametric.

Text

Active concept text or concept derived from a parametric.

Code lines

Parametric concept generation rules, in price tables not compiled.

Concepts

List type concepts price of the work. The windows “Activities”, “Institutions” and “Man-

agement Systems” show other concepts.

Layouts

All: Budget

Basic data of the concept.

All: Other prices

It displays almost the same fields as the “Other estimate prices” layout from “Tree” or

“Estimate” window.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 217

All: Extended data

Displays the category and the number of concepts upper / lower.

Work items: Measurements

Most useful values of the work items for estimating.

Materials and other: Budget

Concepts of type material and others, with its category and total quantity.

Manpower: Budget

Concepts of manpower with their total quantity.

Equipment: Budget

Concepts of equipment with its total quantity.

Work item: Budget and objective

Work items, with the comparison between estimate and target.

Concepts for hire

Concepts that can be hired, according to their estimated quantity, as the target.

Labor and machinery in phases

Concepts of manpower and equipment that have total quantities in the estimate or in

the target and therefore can be used in the planning and resources adjust. See “Re-

sources” subordinate window.

Supplies contract orders

Concepts of type supply with the necessary data to make purchases and contracting or

controlling their deviations.

Supplies

Concepts of type supply with the data obtained during the execution of the project.

Supplies of materials

Supplies of material type with the total quantities necessary to track the project.

Supplies to purchase

Purchased supplies with the amounts required to monitor during the execution of the

project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 218

Stocks: Consumption by imputation

Concepts of type supply consumed by imputation, with stocks calculated by the pro-

gram.

Stocks: Consumption per target

Concepts of type supply consumed by target, with stocks typed by user.

You can also change the coefficient of theoretical consumption and lack score detect

whether a production concept.

Destination

Concepts of type target with theirs real prices and quantities.

Concepts off estimate

Concepts that are not part of the decomposition of other concept.

Subordinate windows

Text

Main text of the concept. See “Use Interface: Windows text”.

Thumbnails

Files associated to the concept. Check “VIEW: Files”.

Resources

Quantity in what is necessary each resource of the project, for days, calculated with “For

days, months and years” option of “PROCESSES: Calculate resources”.

For easy reference, it also shows the intermediate dates, but the resource does not

need them.

Keywords

Keywords or parameters associated to the concept, with the operation described in

“VIEW: Keywords”.

Parents

Concepts that within its decomposition have the active concept.

It lets easily check the performance and amount in their superiors.

If concepts are added in this subordinate window, the active concept is included in the

breakdown of each added concept with the indicated quantity.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 219

Children

Inferiors concepts to the active one.

Supplies

Apparitions of the concept as supply in the various documents. It is especially useful in

filtering layouts for supplies. Check ‘Show: Supplies “.

Allocations

Appearances of the concept as destination of allocations, manuals or created during

the calculation for the concepts consumed by target.

It is especially useful in the layout that filters the destinations. Check “VIEW: Supplies”.

Prices

Prices of a concept in the pricing entities or in the linked works. Check “VIEW: Prices”.

Diary

Activities

List of concepts of “Activity” nature mainly used in take-off lines.

To view data by month or stages that correspond to the fields chosen in multiple fields,

you must add the activities to the decomposition of a chapter, and to avoid duplication

of the amounts, the amounts thereof shall be annulated.

Layouts

Summary

Code, number and description of the activity, with icons that indicate the types of asso-

ciated information.

Estimate

Estimate obtained from the activities of the take-off lines.

Other prices of estimate

Estimate supplementary columns, which allow to obtain other amounts or ratios based

on the values entered in the “UnitAltFactor” field.

Estimate by basic elements

Amount of the estimate of the activities broken down by nature.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 220

Estimate and target

Comparative study between the sales estimate and the cost estimation by activities.

Planning

Breakdown by stages or certifications of target cost of each activity.

Certifications by basic elements

Amount certificated of activities broken down by natures.

Certification

Certified amount of activities broken down by certifications.

Estimate by statuses

Certification by statuses

Amount of estimate and certification of activities, broken down by approval states of

the take-off lines.

Incomes and expenditures

Comparison between planned and certified amount of activities. May be seen globally

or by certifications.

Production

Amount of the total, planned and planned production of the activities, valued at esti-

mate price.

Cost control

Current amount of activities broken down by certifications.

Subordinate windows

Work items

Work items that contains take-off lines of each activity, with their estimate quantities

and amounts.

The shown work items derived directly from the stages table, so it is not necessary to

recalculate the activities.

The program calculates the approximate duration of the work items associated to more

than one activity, in proportion to their relative quantity. Due to rounding, the sum in

days may be not match to the total length.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 221

Resources

Amount of each resource for each activity. It is calculated in “PROCESS: Calculate re-

sources” with the “By activities.”

Stages and activities

take-off lines whose activity corresponds to the activity or active concept.

Entities

Concepts that correspond to building agents, suppliers and pricing entities.

The general operation, fields and subordinate windows are identical to those described

for the “concepts” window.

Layouts

All

All entities, with their identifying information.

Data agents

Suppliers and other agents of the building, with their identifying information.

Invoicing

Details of payment method, tax percentages and deductions, contra accounts and ac-

counting of expenses.

Suppliers (amounts)

Suppliers’ economic data.

Promoters (amounts)

Economic details of the type customer entities.

Price assignment entities

Entities of bidder type and price, allowing you to assign prices to concepts as described

in “Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Comparison of multiple pric-

es”.

The grey entities are not added to the compared layouts.

Diary

Hierarchical window with a calendar that shows information of the project that can be

associated with dates:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 222

• Amounts of the scheduled prices structures (planning, certification and execu-

tion), calculated with “CALCULATIONS: Take-off lines”.

• Project financial details, which are calculated with “CALCULATIONS: Docu-

ments”.

• Necessary resources by dates, which are calculated with “PROCESS: Calculate re-

sources”.

• Concepts and files associated to a date.

Nature of the elements of the diary:

N Type NatC Use

1 XXI

Sum of all years.

2 Year

Sum of every month.

3 month

Sum of all days.

4 Day

Day does not correspond to a stage of certification.

5 Certification

Day of one stage of approved certification.

5 Certification

Day of the last stage of approved certification.

5 Certification

Day of one stage without approved certification.

The “N” field indicates the numerical value of the “Diary.Type” field.

Icons of the field “Info” are described in “Use Interface: Layout: Columns of information

fields”.

When there is information associated to a date, appears also associated or totalized at

higher levels, as the month and year.

Double -click on an amount that comes from documents, opens the corresponding

window, filtered by that date.

Holiday

The holidays are not taken into account in the temporarily planning. The background of

the icon is red.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 223

Labor day

Day as laborable, with grey background.

Certification

Day corresponding to a stage or certification.

Not a certification day

Day does not correspond to a certification stage.

Current certification

The values of the later stages do not intervene in the calculations.

Layouts

They are similar to those of the “Dates” window, except that in “Diary” are not shown

the layouts related to periods or stages.

Planning

Useful layout for creating the economic planning by manual annotation of percentage

or weight of expense in each certification, or by using any of the alternatives proposed

by the suggest button in the “WeightPlan” field.

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Economic planning: Fill economic planning”.

Planning by approval states

Planning and production provided by states of approval.

Planning and certification

Costs and revenues forecast, and certification.

Breakdown by natures

Anticipated costs and revenues by natures.

Certification by statuses

Tracking certifications by the direction of the project:

• Amounts of certifications disaggregated by the estimate approval states.

• Planned quantity in each period, valued at estimate price for comparison.

Production

Amounts of production and certification, to estimate price.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 224

EVM Earned Value

Project tracking in cost and time, from the point of view of the construction company.

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto the “Recruitment and ordering, in-

voicing and control” section.

Documents

Administrative track by document types.

Invoices

Control of invoicing, with deductions, taxes, payments and collections.

Receipts and payments

Receipts and payments by state, with the balance of the period and cash flow.

Subordinate windows

The diary information is exclusively associated to days. When placed in months or years

or in the root concept, the program shows the set of information associated with every

day covering that period.

The text is excepted, which is unique and may be associated with any date.

Text

Text associated to the date.

Thumbnails

Files associated with the day or period containing it.

If files on this window are dragged or imported, they are associated with the current

date.

If you drag from other windows, they are associated with the file date, except the bill,

which is associated with the date of issuance.

Maturities

Maturities of the date or period.

Concepts by date

Concepts whose “Date” field matches the chosen period.

In this window you can choose layouts to see:

• Concepts of type price.

• Concepts of management systems.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 225

• Records for monitoring management systems.

Resources

Displays the required amounts of each concept to execute the work within the period

specified in the selected schema (phases or dates). Are calculated with “PROCESS: Cal-

culate resources”, “For days, months and years.”

Concepts

Items that amounts certificates and financial documents for months, years, and in gen-

eral, that have information for periods of the agenda.

In this window you can choose layouts to see:

• Certification

• Production

• Supplies

• Destination

• Suppliers (amounts)

• Promoters (amounts)

These layouts show the type of information mentioned in similar, with the difference

that here are associated concepts with periods.

Dates

Calendar as a list, similar to the “Diary” window. You can filter by any field, allowing you

to see only natural days, months, certifications or years.

Layouts

Layouts with the name equal to the “Diary” window has the same content, except that it

also shows the accumulated fields to origin.

Stages: Planning

Useful layout for creating the economic planning by manual annotation of percentage

or weight of expense in each certification, or by using any of the alternatives proposed

by the suggest button in the “WeightPlan” field.

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Economic planning: Fill economic planning”.

Stages: Planning by approval states

Planning and production provided by states of approval.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 226

Stages: Planning and certification

Costs and revenues forecast, and certification.

Stages: Breakdown by natures

Anticipated costs and revenues by natures.

Stages: Certifications by approved states

Certification by states and provided certification.

Stages: Repricing

Amounts required to submit a certification according to regulations. Check “Presto in

project management: Certification: Official certifications”.

Stages: Production

Production and certification amounts, all valued at estimate price.

Stages: EVM Earned Value

Project tracking in cost and time, from the point of view of the construction company.

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto the “Recruitment and ordering, in-

voicing and control” section.

Month: Documents

Administrative track by document types.

Month: Invoices

Control of invoicing, with deductions, taxes, payments and collections.

Month: Receipts and payments

Receipts and payments by state, with the balance of the period and cash flow.

Days

Every day of the diary.

Months

All months of the calendar. It let setting the rate of inflation.

Subordinate windows

Are the same as the “Diary” window, except the following:

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 227

Work items

It displays the work items with information associated to a stage, so in the dates win-

dow, you must have activated any of the stage layouts. If you want to display the col-

umns for the amounts of any of the financial documents, must be included manually,

until getting the desired columns layout.

Gantt chart

The time schedule described in “Presto in the planning stage: Temporary Planning”. The

following layouts can be combined with filter options tasks:

Summary

Basic information about the task.

Durations

Data for calculating durations by time and cost.

Display planned dates

Total duration and estimated dates resulting from the calculation.

View clearances

Dates and clearances resulting from the calculation.

Natural dates

Estimated dates calculated as correlates working days, and amounts.

Display real dates

Real dates and executed percentage.

State type tasks

Dates for each of the states.

Tasks listing

This window displays the tasks in a list, filtered and sorted by different criteria, without

relation to the structure of the estimate.

The behaviour is almost identical to “Gantt Chart” and their layouts:

Summary type tasks

Estimated dates and duration of the tasks of summary type.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 228

Summary type tasks (real dates)

Estimated dates and actual dates of the tasks of summary type.

Calculated dates

Quantities and durations of the planned tasks.

Calculated dates (clearances)

Dates and clearances of the planned tasks.

Dates calculated (resources)

Estimated dates calculated as correlates working days, and amounts.

Calculated dates (real dates)

Real dates and percentage of execution.

Critical tasks

Critical path tasks, without clearances.

Dates from superior

Estimated dates of tasks of type floating.

Economic planning

Tasks located on the dates of your economic planning.

State type tasks

Dates for approval statuses for each task.

Planned

All schedulable tasks currently included in the Gantt chart.

Unplanned

Schedulable tasks not currently included in the Gantt chart.

All

All schedulable tasks.

Resources by groups

Displays the resources previously calculated by “PROCESS: Calculate resources”, mark-

ing one of the options “On stage, grouped by”, and its content is the basis for building

contracts.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 229

Scheduled by stages are obtained and in the multiple fields to the right quantities or

amounts are shown, depending on the layout is.

The fields in this table cannot be edited, but you can delete entire lines.

Layouts

All

Resources disaggregated by groups with their total quantities.

Quantities

Resources disaggregated groups, with the planned quantity in stages.

Amounts

Resources disaggregated by groups, with the amounts in stages.

Groups

Groups resulting from the calculation of resources, with the amount planned for each

stage and group.

Pending contracts

Groups resulting from the calculation of resources and whose contracted quantity is

less than the total quantity of the target. The unitary and total price in the estimate and

target, and amounts planned by stages are displayed. The default option of contracts

creation is based on the contents of this table.

Contracts

This window and their subordinate windows allow you to enter the contracts and their

supplies, in order to ask bids to the suppliers, compare it and choose the contractor.

Check “Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and pur-

chasing”.

Each layout of the supplies subordinate window corresponds to layout of the same

name in the main window.

You can drag supplies from the subordinate window of a contract to another, for ex-

ample, to split or consolidate contracts.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 230

Layouts

All

All contracts.

Without suppliers

Contract without associated suppliers.

Not awarded

It lets associate suppliers, request pricing, compare and awarding contracts.

Awarded

Contracts with awarded supplier, with their amounts of planning and contract.

Cost control

Amounts of planning, award, certification and execution of contracts.

Orders

The orders are purchase orders sent to suppliers.

The general explanation of the process of cost control and the documents contained in

“Presto for the construction company Turnover: Records of economic control”.

Delivery orders

Documents accompanying to supplies when received at the work.

The general explanation of the process of cost control and the documents contained in

“Presto for the construction company Turnover: Records of economic control”.

It is considered that a supply has been purchased if is in a delivery document or in an

invoice.

Works assignment

Documents that help to write allocations of concepts in destinations and do not repre-

sent purchases.

Internally, work assignments are documents of delivery without supplier and its code

appears in the “Delivery” field.

The general explanation of the process of cost control is contained in “Analysis of costs

and expenses”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 231

Work assignments while calculating the costs, in concepts of consumption by target,

are automatically generated.

Invoices

The general explanation given in “Presto for the construction company Turnover: Rec-

ords of economic control”.

Subordinated window

Are the same for all documents, except the following:

Maturities

Dates, amounts and method of payment agreed for an invoice.

Supplies

Supply concept relationship types that appear in documents of economic management.

The complaints which are parts of work (not supplier deliveries), but not including sup-

plies contracts.

Grayed non-editable fields that are not taken into account, as the fate of supplies con-

sumption by purpose or other documents supplies parts work.

Double click on the field in a document, opens the corresponding window filtered by

that document.

In this window you can delete complete supplies, as well as create, delete or rename

the documents directly associated with each supply that be editable, with the same

effect as if working in the specific window. If the last of the documents which include

the supply is deleted, it disappears completely.

The context menu allows unfolding supplies, or change the type of consumption.

Layouts

All

Supplies that are in orders, deliveries or invoices.

Orders

Supplies that are in orders.

Procurement

Supplies that are in deliveries or approved invoices.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 232

Supplies in pending documents

Supplies that are in deliveries and unapproved invoices or orders.

Supplies in issued invoices

Supplies that are in customer invoices.

Valid inputs to cost centers

Valid allocations of supplies.

Supplies not used

Supplies not consumed.

Maturities

All Maturities of the work. Double click on the “Invoice” field opens the filtered invoices

for that document. Check “Presto for contractors: Invocing”.

Variables

It contains a variety of internal data of the work. Not the root concept nor in “: An in-

formation system: Presto at the stage of project data and general properties of the

work” are included.

Layouts

Correspond to the different types of variables.

Common to all projects

General variables used internally by the program.

Reports and templates

Variables of the used reports and templates, with the latest answers.

Wizards

Variables of wizards used with the latest answers.

Revit

Parameters generated by the “Cost-It” complement, with the properties assigned in the

model.

User

It allows user to define custom variables for each project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 233

All

All variables.

Concepts

Subordinated window showing the concepts that contain equal terms to the active var-

iable.

Uses of the variable

This subordinate window displays the Presto reports, templates and wizards in which

the active variable are used.

Variable inspector

This icon generates the list of components, through all the reports, templates and wiz-

ards that are accessible in their corresponding directories, more user-specific ones.

Files

List with all files associated to the project.

Check “Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Additional project files”.

Layouts

All

Each file appears only once.

Graphic files

Files of type graphic. Each file appears only once.

Not associated

Files that have been without associating to concepts or documents.

Associated to concepts (all)

Each file appears as many times as is associated with concepts.

Associated to concepts (spec texts)

Text file type associated concepts. Each file appears as many times as is associated with

a concept.

Associated to contracts | orders | deliveries and work assignments | invoices

Type text files associated with each type of document. Each file appears as so often is

associated to the document.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 234

Window subordinate “Thumbnails”.

Displays thumbnails of the associated files.

Gallery

It is accessed by double-clicking an associated file in the “Thumbnail” window or the

“Files” window.

If the file is text, their behaviour is right for text windows.

When a graph contains the following actions are available:

Action Result

Double click with the mouse

wheel.

In drawings, zoom by extension.

In pictures, zoom by extension and

1:1 size, alternately.

Mouse wheel. Increases and decreases the zoom.

Click and drag. Zoom by window.

Drag with the mouse wheel. Displacement.

Keywords

Key words or concepts associated with the work, which can be generated automatically

using “TOOLS: Generate terms”, handwriting or copy of price tables.

Also function as additional parameters or properties to the concept, allowing to associ-

ate more structured information may come from other files and formats.

Using terms like support for searches

They can be used for:

• Filter and sort criteria available in this window.

• Include in the search filter for words.

Use of terms to add properties to the concepts

The user can associate a keyword to a concept, contract or entity, and assign any value

to each of them, which is linked to the concept and specific keyword.

This powerful and flexible use allows to add an unlimited number of properties not

available in the tables.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 235

Using expressions in columns user, you can display the values noted.

The default expression “Term concept” can be used on windows budget.

The default expression “Term element” can be used in the measurement windows.

To operate with other numeric values, it should be noted that the values of the terms

are alphanumeric data.

In the Expression Builder there Presto specialized functions in the management of

terms:

• keywordvalue: Gets the value from a concept and term.

• keywordelementvalue: Gets the value from a concept and term element.

• keywordtype: Indicates whether the value is calculated or user-written.

Using terms like BIM model parameters

The integration between BIM and Presto models allows associating a wide variety of

properties or parameters to the concepts, using them as keywords. Parameters can be

associated to concepts using [F7] Suggest, as it shows existing parameters and varia-

bles, created for example by the user or from Revit.

Refer to “Variables” window, especially as regards the “Revit” layout (“Presto at the

stage of project: An information system: Data and general project settings”).

Create keywords

This “TOOLS” menu option associate to each concept of the project keywords in func-

tion of words that appear on its description, text or associated text files.

They can also be added manually in the “Keywords” subordinate window of the esti-

mate.

When creating a term, a variable is automatically created with the same name. Variables

created from terms can be found in the “Variables” window layout “Terms”.

Characteristics of generation of keywords:

• The terms are generated in uppercase.

• The keywords are generated in magenta.

• The existing keywords in magenta color can optionally by deleted.

• The existing terms are not cleared.

• The different options allow you limit the list of generated keywords.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 236

• The words of four or fewer characters terminated in point and followed by a

lowercase letter are considered abbreviations and are not included.

Fields terms

Keywords.Code

Concept code associated to a descriptor.

.Keyword

Descriptor associated with a concept.

.Value

Alphanumeric information associated with each concept and keyword.

You can score securities to be converted later into numbers. This case is to be used as

the point similarly decimal expressions Presto.

.Element

Subtype of family or identifier of the take-off line, which allows to know which element

belongs each parameter or keyword.

.Note

Free user text use is associated with a parameter or term. You can come up with con-

tent from any connection with other programs.

Keywords.UsrNum

Free use numeric field associated with the parameter or term.

.Type

0: Inserted by user. 1: Generated by Presto.

Relations

List with all relationships between higher and lower concepts. Provide inquiry and glob-

al operations over fields of relations.

By eliminating a concept in windows that show relationships, such as this one and esti-

mates, just go away your relationship with superior concept. The concept of the work

disappears only if it is removed from the last relationship, unless listed as supply or cost

center into a document.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 237

Layouts

Chapters and work items

Relations that support measurement and certification.

Take-off lines between two work items

Relationships between two work items.

Concepts and QMASS

Relationships where the lower concept is QMASS type.

Contracts

Relations between contracts and supplies.

Activities and certifications

This window shows all the set of activities and certifications or stages of the whole

work, and their layouts refer to specific of the subordinate windows that are described

below in the activities and certification or stages, except the following:

Activities (chapters)

Certifications (chapters)

It shows the data of stages table by activity and certification respectively, and serve to

eliminate calculated value that cannot be removed otherwise.

Activities (subordinate of estimates)

This window displays the quantities and amounts of active concept, broken down by

activity.

Only the activities that have content for active concept and cannot modify the results,

are shown.

Layouts

Estimate

Summary data of activities, including internal number associated to it.

Estimate by statuses

Quantities and amounts of activities, broken down by estimate approval states.

Certification

Quantities and amounts certified in each activity.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 238

Certification by statuses

Quantities and amounts certified of the activities, broken down by estimate approval

states.

Production

Amounts of estimated total production, planned, actual, certification, certified and non

certified production of the activity, all valued at estimate price.

Stages (subordinate of estimates)

This window displays the quantities and the amounts of active concept, broken down

by stages of certification.

For easier viewing and data entry, in these layouts defined certification all stages lines

are presented, even without content.

If you directly enter quantities, associations of take-off lines to that stage are lost. These

lump sums never be broken down by activities or approval statuses.

Layouts

Evolution of estimate and target

Historical values of the estimate and target calculated for each approved certification.

This way you can see the evolution of the estimate along the execution.

Fields are calculated if there is any content for the approved certification. The blue ones

correspond to the certifications before than approved, and the magenta to approved

ones.

Planning by approval states

Breakdown of planning by certifications and states of approval.

Planning and certification

Breakdown by certifications of the planning, estimated production and certification.

Certification

Quantities and amounts of each certification.

Certification by statuses

Data for each certification, which correspond to the various approval states of estimate.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 239

Certifications by quantities

Comparison between the quantities of planning, certification and actual execution of

each certification and cumulative to origin.

Production

Planning, production, certified and non-certified production, all valued at estimate

price.

Cost control

Quantities and amounts of the corresponding certificates to the planning, the actual

execution and the allocations to cost centers.

EVM Earned Value

Earned value data disaggregated by the hierarchical structure of the project.

See “Technical Questions” on the website of Presto the “Recruitment and ordering, in-

voicing and control” section.

Stages and activities

This window shows the take-off lines associated with the relationship between the con-

cept and its superior. The general process described in “Presto in the design stage:

Measurements”.

This information is seen in two types of windows, with the following features:

Main window menu “VIEW”

It contains all take-off lines of the estimate, in order to facilitate verification and global

operations.

Subordinated window of the “Estimate” window

It contains the take-off lines of the active work item.

Shared layouts by the two types of window

Estimate

Lines belonging to any state of the estimate, except the annulated, with the basic fields

of take-off lines.

Estimate: Identification fields

Estimate lines with fields coming especially from BIM models.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 240

Economic planning

Take-off lines associated to a planning stage.

Estimate and planning

Take-off lines belonging to the estimate or are associated to a planning stage.

Estimate and certification

Take-off lines belonging to the estimate or are associated to a certification stage.

Certification

Take-off lines associated to a certification stage.

Certification: Identification fields

Take-off lines associated to a certification stage, with fields coming especially from BIM

models.

Production

Take-off lines associated to a stage of certification or execution.

All

All take-off lines.

All: Identification fields

All take-off lines with subtotals for all stages, especially with the fields of BIM models.

Exclusive layouts of “Take-off lines” main window

Approved and pending

Filter the take-off lines whose status is indicated by the layout.

Take-off lines references

References between work items set to “Same measurement” option.

Drawings DWG | Allplan | Revit

The content of each of these layouts is set to the information contained in the program

where come, filtered by the content of the “TakeOffLines.Origin” field.

Temporary measures

Check “Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Importing take-off lines”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 241

Layouts

New work items

Take-off lines of the reference pertaining to work items that will be added to the pro-

ject.

Variations on estimate

Variations on planning

Variations on certification

Measurements in which not difference of budgeting, planning and certification, respec-

tively between the reference and work.

Take-off lines to transfer

Take-off lines that are to be transferred to the work.

Take-off lines to remove

Measurements that are not listed in the reference but in the work. May represent a ref-

erence extract, or may have been deliberately removed. The user must decide what

action to take based on the prosecuted goal. If not removed, while transfering the take-

off lines will be eliminated in the work.

All

All lines of temporal measurement.

Prices

“Prices” main window shows the complete list of alternative prices and other data asso-

ciated to a concept, which is stored in the “Prices” table.

The use is described in:

• Prices for references and bidders that are described in “Presto at the stage of

project: An information system: Comparison of multiple prices”.

• Supplier Prices for contracts described in “Presto for contractors: Purchasing and

subcontractors: Recruitment and shopping.”

• Amounts in other estimates and connected works in “Presto at the stage of pro-

ject: An information system: Integration of works: Works linked”.

The “Prices” subordinate window, shows this information for all entities of the active

concept.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 242

Subordinated window “Prices of a work” shows information of all concepts associated

to an entity or linked project.

On the track header you can check if a field of the window is the only value of “con-

cepts” table or multiple value with the same name of the table “Prices”.

Layouts

Prices

Relations between entities of type price and concepts.

Offers

Relations between vendors and concepts.

Prices in work type entities

Relationships between projects and concepts of type price and QMASS.

Data in work type entities

Relationships between projects and entities, such as suppliers and agents of the build-

ing.

Suppliers

Relations between providers who have contracts and concepts.

All

All relationships between entities and concepts.

Prices (subordinate)

Layouts in estimates windows

In price assignment entites

List of entities of type bidder or price, and the values associated with each of them to

the concept.

In contracts

List of suppliers that have offered the concept in contracts.

Concepts layouts window

Prices in other projects

Concept quantities and prices relating to the estimate in the different linked projects.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 243

Documents in other projects

Concept amount in the various documents of economic management in the linked pro-

jects.

Prices of a work

This subordinate window is in the estimate windows and in the entities. It’s especially

designed for use in a central of integration of projects, as shown for each linked project

the data indicated in the several layouts of the window.

Layouts

All

All concepts.

Quantities and prices

Concepts with their total quantities, prices and amounts.

Contracts

Global data of contracts awarded in the project.

In documents

Quantities and amounts of the concepts in the documents of economic management.

Entities and suppliers

Amounts resulting from economic management.

QMASS

List of operations and controls of the management systems.

Check description

It compares the description of the central project concepts with those of the linked pro-

jects, displaying those are different.

Messages

Text window with messages, notifications (blue) and errors (red) issued.

If an option generates repetitive messages, are output only the first.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 244

Reference

This menu provides quick access to the user’s projects or other help references for

drafting the estimate.

Estimates, price tables and catalogues on the Internet

The content is updated through Internet, and the user has not control over its content.

Estimates defined in the user’s working environment

This group includes Presto files:

• “Working environment: Directories: Projects”.

• “Working environment: Directories: Reference”.

• “Working environment: Database prices”.

• Directories accessible by Presto Server.

The menu content is updated each time the execution of Presto starts, and is limited to

512 entries.

Tools

Operations that affect the estimate as a whole, including all pricing structures. Each is

described where used.

CAD

Check “Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Take-off lines of CAD drawings”.

Replace concepts

Concept update

Check “Presto in the design stage: estimate: estimate Organization “.

Operate with prices

Adjust price

Check “Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Pricing and quantities”.

Reduce levels

Restructure breakdown

Check “Presto in the design stage: estimate: estimate Organization “.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 245

Restructure take-off lines

Check “Presto in the design stage: Take-Offs: Take-Off Lines”.

Regroup chapters

Check “Presto in the design stage: estimate: estimate Organization “.

Analyze table

Refer to “use interface: Editing items.”

Working with Text

Translate text

Refer to “Use Interface: Windows of text”.

Create keywords

Refer to “VIEW: Keywords”.

Operate with graphics

Operate files

Refer to “Complementary files to the project.”

Cross-check two projects

See “Presto at the stage of project: Budget Analysis and checks”.

Technical specifications

See “Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Specification”.

Parametrics

See “Rebuild” in “Presto at the stage of project: Budget: parametric concepts”.

See it on the development of parametric concepts “technical consultations” web of

Presto, section “Budgets: Working with price tables.”

Processes

Operations affecting concrete prices structures, such as those of the target, and are

described in the process where they are used.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 246

Generate target

Update target decomposition

Restructure target decomposition

Break down work items by decomposition

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Economic Planning”.

Create activities for groups of items

Create activities by decomposition work items

Create activities division items or activities

See “Presto in the planning stage: Economic Planning for activities”.

Create dates and certifications

Check “Presto in project management: Certification”.

Fill economic planning

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Economic Planning”.

Copy certifications

Check “Presto for contractors: Production”.

Fill agenda items

Some functionalities related to the diary and concepts need doing this action.

Fill groups

Calculate resources

Check “Presto for contractors company: Purchasing and subcontractors”.

Create contracts

Check “Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and pur-

chasing”.

Create invoices

Check “Presto in the planning stage: Financial Planning “and” Presto for contractors:

Invoicing: Invoices”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 247

Link work

Update information

Update documents

Export documents

Check “Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Integration of works” and

“Presto for contractors: Centralized invoicing”.

Plugins

They are independent programs of Presto that perform specific tasks in the projects.

Appear in this menu .EXE and .VBS files contained in the directory indicated in “FILE:

Working environment: Directories: Plugins,” and executables that are in the directory

specific user.

To avoid unwanted interference, previously close any open projects with other versions of

Presto.

Develop plugins

Plugins can read and modify any data of the work. Users who want to write a plugin

must know some programming language capable of interacting with the automation

server available in Presto, such as VBScript.

The server has many features for facilitate the reading and editing of these projects,

such as its creation and opening, positioning in tables, reading and insertion of records

and fields, and so on.

To access the automation server is needed:

• Have run Presto at least once on the computer that you are going to program.

• Start the application by creating an object of the “PrestoApplication” class.

En www.rib-software.2-inglés, apartado "Technical questions", hay ejemplos and docu-

mentación relativa a estas funciones.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 248

Calculations

Stages and activities

Recalculates all results dependent changes in the take-off lines. Check “Presto in the

design stage: Measurements “.

Prices

Recalculates all results dependent changes in prices and quantities. Check “Presto in

the design stage: estimate: Pricing and quantities “.

Planning

Recalculates all results dependent changes in the bar chart. Check “Presto in the plan-

ning stage: Temporary Planning “.

Documents

Recalculates all results dependent changes in the content of the documents. Check

“Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Records of economic control”.

Real costs

It recalculates all results that depend on allocations of costs and expenses.

Check “Presto for contractors: Analysis of costs and expenses”.

Calculate all

Recalculate all results.

REPORTS

This chapter describes options that allow:

• Generate results on screen or printed using predefined or custom reports.

• Generate documents from Word and Excel templates.

• Export reports to other formats such as PDF, RTF and TXT.

• Create new reports or modify existing ones.

Los informes son archivos con la extensión ".PrestoReport". Cada archivo contiene una

miniatura de la primera página, que es visible desde el explorador de archivos de Win-

dows siempre que Presto haya sido instalado en ese ordenador. If you change the re-

port layout thumbnail is generated again from the active project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 249

Choose reports

The “REPORTS” menu in the main window displays and allows Presto print reports and

templates that are in the directory reports and templates, and user-specific directory.

The directory can be changed in “FILE: Working environment: Directories”.

The menu content is updated each time the execution of Presto starts, and is limited to

512 entries.

Print report or template

The dialog box lets display the report, export it or print it directly. It allows you to

choose reports and templates located in any directory, showing the thumbnail if the

appropriate option in the dialog box is selected.

Preview

It shows the report final aspect. The header options lets tour the report on different

scales and execute the printing, complete or by pages.

If a report exceeds the width of a page, more pages are generated, except that the re-

maining area is less than the width of the right margin.

Debug

Displays the name of each control rather than its result, which facilitates the design or

modification of reports.

Each section displays with a characteristic background color, except the section has its

own color, making it easy to detect their limits, even if they have printable content. The

colors of nested sections, such as “Element”, are shown in different shades of the same

basic tone.

Templates of Excel and Word documents

The structure of the templates described in “Service request” web of Presto, “Connect-

ing with Word and Excel” section.

Word template

It is used as a basis to generate a Word document with project data. The desired ex-

pressions must appear in a Word template, with the resources and the usual syntax of

Presto.

When you execute the option a new Word document is created, you can freely change.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 250

To expedite the process, and depending on the version of Word used, it may be appro-

priate:

• Disable spell checking.

• Do not use the Windows clipboard while the template is generated.

• Save the template in “ Print Layout”.

• Turn off the Word “Use smart cut and paste” if in the generated document ap-

pears words without space between them.

Excel template

It is used as a basis to generate an Excel workbook with a predefined structure, whose

cells are filled with project information, similar to Word templates.

If a plugin named “Presto” in the template, it runs after export.

automatic reporting

Specific instructions for the design are in “Design Report” of the manual.

Design report

This option or icon gives access to the Report Layout window. When run from a win-

dow table automatically creates a report containing the visible columns and applied

filters, except the filter words. In the hierarchical mode, takes into account the levels

chosen in the dropdown list.

If there is an active sub window, the report also prints the elements thereof relating to

each of the principal.

The result is a report similar to that displayed in the windows of Presto content.

Automate customizing reports

They can reuse the properties of a report used as a base, because new reports auto-

matically applies them many of their properties.

The baseline report should be in the template directory, and its name should be “Tem-

plate”.

The properties of each section are copied to the following positions:

Sección Goes to the same section of the report

Prologue Before

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 251

Sección Goes to the same section of the report

Start Before

Header Before

Master page Overlayed to the content

Foot Behind

Final Behind

Epilogue Behind

Export

Sets file characteristics resulting from the export of the report. The “FILE: Export” option

is available in the window to design reports, and has the same functionality.

Format

PDF

The “Entire document” paper size generates a single page with the necessary dimen-

sions to enter the entire report, only one header and one foot. It’s especially suitable for

printing large documents, such as the Gantt chart. If you choose the “User” size you can

directly set the width and height.

RTF

In this format, which allows you recovering with Word the result of the report, different

styles are assigned to each section, allowing you to easily modify the generated docu-

ment. Rectangles are not exported.

Paper sizes are the same as the PDF format.

TXT

It generates a plain text without format for importing in other programs. The reports

must have an ordered structure of fields, without overlaps.

Specific options allow this format:

• Fill in spaces in blank to create the distance between the fields.

• If the previous option is enabled, you can also set the number of lines on each

page and the number of characters or columns of each line. If too many charac-

ters to the right will overlap to the start of each line.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 252

• If it’s not activated the previous option, you can choose a fields separator. If you

need fixed length fields, format each field as desired.

• If there is a selected separator of fields, not page breaks are generated.

• Export the header and footer on every page of the report, only once or none.

The file can be added to the end of the file of the same name.

Window

The different combinations of windows allow convenient access to the most common

ways to use the program.

Save sets of tabs

Redefine a combination of windows taking as the current model.

Set [1..5]

Each set is a combination of windows that is useful for some of the most common pro-

cesses of the program.

Retrieve original tabs

Reassigns the original combinations of Presto.

Help

Presto manual, activation status of Presto Modules, and other aids to the user.

Activation

Under the “Help” menu showing the license and authorization system detected by Pres-

to.

The list of modules has a “Use” column to activate / deactivate the available modules,

allowing its use or being free for other network users.

La información relativa a los procesos de instalación and activación está disponible en

la "Setup guide" de www.rib-software.2-inglés.

Activate

It makes the process of activating of the modules through an Internet connection.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 253

If you do not have this connection is restricted or an activation file, except with the In-

ternet activation system can be realized.

See the “Activation file” on “Installation Guide”.

Internet / Motherboard

Choose this option if you have a separate license for any of these authorization sys-

tems.

Internet activation

This authorization system is activated in each session by checking the server of Presto,

which is renewed periodically. It can be used on any computer, but not simultaneously.

The license is stored in the file “Presto.LicInternet”.

Activation by motherboard

This authorization system is linked to the computer’s motherboard. No virtual machines

are supported. Only the Internet connection is required during the initial authorization.

The license is stored in the file “Presto.LicMotherboard”.

Physical device

Choose this option if you have a separate license for this authorization system.

Connect the device to the appropriate port of your computer and continue with the

activation process. If necessary, will be installed the control software of this device.

The license is saved in “Presto.LicUsb”.

Connect to the network license server (PrestoNetActivation)

Choose this option if you have a multiple license, agreeing to a licensing system multi-

user licenses.

Requests the IP address and port where is located the configuration file “PrestoNetActi-

vation.cfg”, where these data are stored.

Access control by users

If you have a user control modules, email and activation code for each user request. If

the identification is positive, they are activated automatically assigned to the user mod-

ules.

El proceso de control de acceso por usuarios se realiza en el área de clientes de

www.rib-software.es and se describe en la "Setup guide".

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 254

Activation files directories

Program Directory Example

Presto Configuration \Users\xxx\AppData\Roaming\Presto

PrestoNetActivation

PrestoServer

Presto setup \Program Files\Presto 2016

Other options

Presto Manual

Access to this manual.

Notes to current version

Clarifications on the latest version.

FAQ database

Access a database with queries and suggestions of Presto.

www.rib-software.2-inglés

Gives access to the corporate website.

License agreement

It displays the license agreement.

About Presto

Software version and corporate information.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 255

Tutorial of estimates For the development of this tutorial, the program settings should be the default at in-

stallation. When in doubt, delete the user’s profile:

Presto160.PrestoPerfilXml

The directory where is displayed is in “FILE: Working environment: Directories: Configu-

ration”.

The “FILE: Working environment: Generals: Show data from header concept” option is dis-

abled, so the active concept is always the concept where the cursor is in the middle of the

table.

1 Creation of concepts

Let’s make an estimate, with take-off lines and certifications.

Create a new project

We will create a new project called COURSE:

1 Select “FILE: New”.

2 Check the directory in which to save the project and change it if you wish by clicking

“Path”.

3 Type COURSE in the “Name” box, choose <None> in “Template”, and accept. Note

that in the title of the main window is the project name.

4 Open “VIEW: Project settings” window and in the “Data” option, enter the following

values :

Summary Casa en Humanes

PostalCode 28970

City HUMANES DE MADRID

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 256

Create the structure of chapters and work items

To move to the field on the right, you can use the [Enter] key on the numeric keypad or

the [Tab] key. To go directly to the next line use the [Enter] key of the alphanumeric

keypad.

Let’s create some chapters and a work item.

In the “Estimate” window:

1 Enter 01 in the “Code” field or press [F7].

2 Go to “Description” field and write EARTHMOVING.

3 Go to the bottom line and enter 03 in the “Code” field.

4 Write FOUNDATIONS in the “Description” field.

5 Repeat to create chapters “04: | STRUCTURES” and “05 | CLOSING”.

6 Double-click on any field in the first chapter to get into its decomposition. The chap-

ter goes to the head. Add the work item:

Code Summary QtyEst Unit Est

E02EM030 Trenching 48,08 m3 13,00

The work item amount is calculated as the product of the quantity by the price and has

a yellow background, indicating that it is a non-editable field.

Create subchapters

Access to the context menu with the right mouse button.

The chapter “ 04 | STRUCTURES” will be divided into two subsections, concrete and

steel:

1 Ascend to the chapter with a double click on the header (grey band), double-click on

this chapter and add the following:

Code Summary QtyEst Unit Est

04 Structures

04H CONCRETE 1

04A STEEL 1

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 257

2 The icon of the “NatC” field indicates that these concepts were created with nature

“Work item”. On this field of “04H” concept choose the nature “Chapter” and do

the same for “04A”.

Breaking down the work item

We will create the inferiors of “E02EM030 | Excavation in trenches”.

1 Place that work item on the header by double clicking on it.

2 Complete the work item with the following information:

Code Summary QtyEst Unit Est

E02EM030 Trenching m3

O01OA070 Mason 0,125 h 12,00

M05EN030 Hydraulic excavator 0,250 h 42,00

3 Up one level with double click on the header and note that the price of the work

item is magenta, indicating that it is the result of a calculation.

Add a text

We will complete the description of this work item by adding a text.

1 Click the “Text” icon in the toolbar of the “Estimate” window.

2 In the “Text” window type:

Trenching, on firm ground, by mechanical means, without charge or transport to

landfill.

3 Select the text you just added, click the “Text color” icon from the toolbar of the text

window, and select a different color.

Duplicate a concept

We will double the previous work item to create a similar without writing all over again.

1 Choose “Duplicate” over the “Code” field of the concept “E02EM030”.

2 Change the proposed code by E02PM030.

3 In the new work item, change the contents of the field “Description” by:

Digging wells

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 258

4 In the “Text” window, replace “trenches” by “wells”.

5 Close the “Text” window.

Changing prices and quantities

The concept “O01OA070 | Bricklayer” is contained in the decomposition of the two

work items.

Write 13.09 in his “Est” field and see how it changes the amount of both.

To reflect the differences between trenching and well, change the performances and

the take-off of the new work item.

Code Summary QtyEst Unit

E02PM030 Digging wells 6,93 m3

O01OA070 Mason 0,130 h

M05EN030 Hydraulic excavator 0,260 h

Each concept figure once in each project and the changes of data that define it, as

price, description or unit, affecting the entire project.

However, the concept quantity in the breakdown of another is a property of the rela-

tionship between them, and the same concept can be part of many relationships with

other parents, each with a different quantity.

Concepts of percentage type

The decomposition of an item may contain concepts that represent a percentage of the

other concepts, representing auxiliary means or otherwise.

We will add a percentage to the “E02PM030” work item.

1 Add after the work item decomposition a concept with code %AUX03. Note that

“QtyEst” contains the price of the work item divided by 100, in magenta.

2 In the “Summary” field type aids and in “ Unit” type %.

3 To increase 3% of price, type in “Est”, 3.

The percentage concepts act only on the decomposed located above. Once defined a

concept of percentage, you can use it in other decompositions, with the same percent-

age.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 259

Indirect costs

If the work CURSO is subject to the Law on Public Sector, we can directly incorporate

the indirect costs allowed.

1 In “VIEW: Project settings” select the “Calculate” option.

2 Type 5 in “Percentage of indirect costs of estimate “ and click “Accept”.

Notice the “AmntEst” field of both work items reflects the change.

Open a reference

A reference is any other Presto project that is open while working on a project.

Open a prices database.

1 Select “FILE: Projects”.

2 Click on “Reference\ESP” directory, located in Presto setup directory, and see the

project it contains.

3 About the project “Extracto del cuadro de precios Centro” select “Open as read

only”.

Copy a concept from a price table

A concept is selected by pressing the numbered box on the left.

1 In the reference, double-click on:

Code Summary

E Decomposed prices

E02 Improvement of land

E02A Cleaning and clearing

2 Select the concept “E02AM010 | Land clearing and cleaning machine” and copy it to

“EDITING: Copy”.

3 Go to “Estimate” window of the COURSE project and place in the header section “01

| EARTHMOVING”.

4 Move to a blank line and insert the concept with “EDITING: Paste”.

5 Write 61.52 as the estimated quantity for this work item.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 260

The copied work item has the price in magenta color, as it is calculated, and can be

modified without affecting the original concept of the reference.

Copy more concepts from prices table

Repeat the above process by taking the necessary work items of the prices table and

dropping in the work COURSE until it has the following contents:

Copy concepts of another project

You can copy work items from any other project, or even whole chapters:

1 Open the project “CursoControl” in the directory “Tutorial\ESP”.

2 Copy the chapter “SANITATION”

3 Insert it into the COURSE project.

4 Close the references.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 261

Sort concepts

To drag a concept, select it, click the left mouse button on any point of the line and re-

lease the button at the desired target line.

Let’s change the order of work items in the chapter “01”.

1 In the “Estimate” window place in the header section.

2 Select the work item “E02AM010 | Land clearing and cleaning machine”.

3 Drag the line to the first position.

Repeat the process to sort the list of chapters.

Auxiliary prices

We will create an auxiliary price, inserting a decomposition to the concept “A02A080 |

Cement Mortar 1/6 m-40”, which is the only work item of “05 | CLOSING” chapter.

1 Place the auxiliary in the header.

2 Complete the following data, and note while typing concepts code of existing con-

cepts in the project, its content is automatically populated.

Code Summary QtyEst Unit Est

A02A080 Cement mortar 1/6 m-40 m3

O01OA070 Mason 1,700 h 13,09

P01CC020 Cement 0,250 t 95,20

P01AA020 River sand 1,100 m3 15,70

P01DW050 Water 0,255 m3 0,71

M03HH020 Concrete mixer 0,400 h 2,00

3 Ascend by double clicking on the header and check the auxiliary price now is a cal-

culated price. The auxiliary code is the grey background to differentiate it from the

undecomposed concepts.

Displacements in the project

Learn to navigate by the work until you understand its structure and gain confidence

with the different ways to navigate into Presto.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 262

1 Use “EDITION: Next” and “EDITION: Previous” to see the breakdown of all work items

in the chapter “01”.

2 Click on the concept to the left on the path set on the head of the “Estimate” win-

dow to access to the root concept.

Access to the “VIEW: Tree” window and browse by the project, using the tools to start

levels.

2 Take-offs

Justify the quantities of the work items.

Create take-off lines

You can use [F9] to copy the upper field and [F7] to retrieve the values of the top fields in

the same column.

We will create the work items take-off lines of chapter “01 | EARTHMOVING”.

1 Click over “Take-off lines” icon in the icons toolbar of the “Estimate” window.

2 Set as active concept “E02AM010 | Land Clearing and cleaning machine”.

3 In “Take-off lines” subordinate window, display “Activity” list and select “Act0010”.

4 Enter the following lines, using the aids referred to in the previous note:

Activity Comment N Length Width Height

Act0010 North zone 1 3,00 3,50

Act0010 Floor 1 8,00 3,00

Act0010 Path 1 3,00 2,00

Act0010 Irregular area 1 7,02

Act0010 Garden area 1 2,00 7,00

Assigning of activities

The activities serve to organize the take-off lines of one or more work items in groups.

1 Set as active concept “E02EM030 | Excavation in trenches”.

2 Extend the “Activity” list and select “+2” to create the “Act0020” activity.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 263

3 Enter the take-off lines that are in the following image associated with this activity.

Write directly the “Comment” field as the last activity of choice is automatically asso-

ciated.

4 When you get to the take-off lines associated to another activity, repeat from step 2.

5 Repeat the process for the following work items, reusing existing activities.

Take-off lines by activity

We want to know the quantities and amounts correspondent for various activities.

1 Note that in each work item appears automatic subtotals ever change the activity

assigned to their lines.

2 Access to the window “VIEW: Activities” and renown the activities as follows:

Code Summary

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 264

Act0010 Previous operations

Act0020 Explanation

Act0030 Trenches and pits

3 Activate “CALCULATIONS: Calculate all” and observe the amount of each activity,

including the assigned lines in all work items.

Checks the work items that make each activity opening the “Work items” subordinated

window.

3 Completion estimate

Refine the results.

Note a different price from calculated

We will introduce a price that does not reflect to the result of decomposition.

1 Choose “Block” in the “Est” field of “E02AM010” work item. Its color changes to

red indicating that it is not the result of its decomposition.

2 Type 1 in its field “Est”.

3 Scroll down to see the breakdown and check what remains.

To retrieve the calculated price must choose “Unlock” on the price of the work

item. Do not do it yet.

Undo changes

You can undo everything done at any time of the making of the project.

1 Choose “EDITION: Undo “ twice consecutively.

2 Note that the price of the previous work item returns to be calculated.

Make a backup

We will make a backup of the current state of the project.

1 Press “FILE:Save” and “FILE: Close”.

2 Select “FILE: Projects” and locate the current project.

3 Choose “Copy” over the project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 265

4 Choose “Paste” and get the new project “Copia_Curso”.

5 To rename, choose “Rename” in the project and type CURSO01Seg .

6 Maintain in the original work, choosing “Open” on COURSE project.

Setting the estimate to an amount

We will reduce the amount of the estimate in an overall percentage.

1 Choose “TOOLS: Adjust price”.

2 Enter 95 in the “%” box. The new amount appears in “Adjust estimate price to ... “.

3 Check the boxes of quantity of manpower and equipment and the box price of ma-

terials. Uncheck any other box.

4 Click “Accept”.

The estimate is set at indicated percentage, by changing the values in the set, so that

they remain valid the decompositions

Window “concepts”

Let’s see the list of arches used in the estimate.

1 Open the “CHECK: Concepts” layout “Materials and others: Budget”. All concepts of

the work with these natures appear.

2 Write P03B* in the mask box and press [Enter]. It appears only the concepts whose

code begins with these initials.

3 To redisplay all concepts enter the * character.

Add agents of the building

Layouts are chosen from the dropdown list to the left of the top of each table window.

We will introduce the details of developer, designer, project manager and builder.

1 Open the “VIEW: Entities”, “Data agents” layout.

2 Add the following agents:

Code Nat Summary Title

ENT0001 Promoter José Cenzano The property

ENT0002 Proyectist Laura Lita The architect

ENT0003 Builder Enrique Cimiento, S.A. The contractor

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 266

ENT0004 Work director José Manuel García The building engineer

3 Select the nature of each entity using the context menu on its field “Nat”.

4 Close the “ Entities” window.

4 Printing and connection with other programs

We consider the estimate COURSE finished, so we proceed to print it on paper, or ex-

port to PDF, RTF, BC3 or Excel format.

Before printing recalculate the work through the “CALCULATIONS: Calculate all” option.

The reports to use are in the “REPORTS: 01 Estimates and take-off lines” menu, and also

find Excel and Word templates, which are identified by their icons.

You can modify the print margins in “FILE: Working environment: Margins”.

Print measurements and estimate

1 At the site above, choose the report “Estimate and take-off lines”. It appears a box

with some questions.

2 Answer “D” to the question refers to the encoding type. Note that concepts codes

are correlative.

3 Click “Preview”. The report is displayed.

4 Press “>“ to see the following pages.

To modify the answers press “Return” button.

Print the summary of the estimate

Repeat the above procedure with the “Summary of estimate”.

To include the percentage of overhead and industrial benefit, like a project of public

procurement:

1 In “VIEW: Project settings” select the “Calculate” option.

2 Enter 6 as % of industrial profit, and 13 % as overhead.

3 Return to preview the report.

To change the % VAT go to “VIEW: Project settings”, “Accounting” option and change

the value of “Percentage of VAT on construction works”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 267

You can preview or print the other reports of “REPORTS: 01 Estimates and Take-off

lines” menu.

Customizing reports: insert a logo in the header

To show a logo in the header of every page:

1 Go to “REPORTS: Design report”.

2 Press “FILE: Open”.

3 Select the “Summary of estimate” report on the reports subdirectory “01 Estimates

and take-off lines”, and press the “Open” button.

4 Extend 2 or 3 cm the “Header” section scrolling down the bottom edge.

5 Select all the controls in this section. To do this, position the cursor on the left ruler

up to the first control, and when its shape changes, click with the left mouse of but-

ton and drag down to cover all controls. While releasing the button, it will be all se-

lectioned.

6 Move them down to free up site by clicking the “Down arrow” key repeatedly.

7 With “TOOLS: Image” create a square in the upper left corner of the section, and

double-click to open their properties.

8 Type 4 in the “Width” property and 2 in the “Height”.

9 Press the suggest button in the “File” property and select “Logotipo para in-

formes.PNG” in the subdirectory “Tutorial\ENG”.

10 Check the result with “FILE: Preview”.

11 Select “FILE:Save as” and save the report with the name “Summary of estimate with

logo” in the same directory as the original, and close the reports design window.

Export reports to PDF or RTF formats

You can export reports to RTF format to open them with a text editor such as Word,

and customize the document with the editor tools. To export:

1 Instead of pressing the “Preview” option, click “Export”.

2 In the “Export” dialog box there are several properties. In “Format “ there is a drop

down list where you can choose from available.

3 The remaining properties are setup paper size, print pages, location of the file to

export, and so on.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 268

Export/Import Excel format

To export to Excel the estimate:

1 Select “ FILE:Export: Excel”.

2 In “Levels” choose “Chapters and work items”.

3 In “Structure” select “Estimate”.

4 Check “Export text” and “Export take-offs” if you wish to export the long text and

take-off lines respectively.

5 Press the “OK” button. It will appear an Excel workbook with the Presto project esti-

mate. Save it as Book1.xls.

To import with Presto an Excel file:

You can import the Excel files which were exported with the previous option.

You can edit in Excel summary, price, quantity or take-off lines.

1 Close the open projects and create a new project whose name is CopiaCursoExcel.

2 Choose “FILE: Import: Excel”, and double-click in the file Book1.xls exported previ-

ously.

Save and close the project with “FILE: Save” and “FILE: Close” respectively.

Export/Import format BC3

To export the project CURSO to this format:

1 Reopen COURSE project.

2 Select “FILE: Export: BC3 “ and save the file in the directory proposed.

To import a project or a database prices in BC3 format:

1 Close the open projects and create a new project whose name is CopiaCursoBC3.

2 Choose “FILE: Import: BC3”.

3 Select the Curso.BC3 file exported previously. Press the “Accept” button.

Close the project saving changes.

5 Certifications

We will introduce some certifications in the COURSE project. Certifications are correla-

tive numbers, which correspond to the dates assigned as certification day in the “Dates”

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 269

window. The removal or insertion of days of certification does not remove their con-

tents, but that moves between ones dates and the others.

Management dates

We will create a schedule of certifications and remove a date, as an example of the pro-

cedure.

Create a calendar of certifications

1 In the “Estimate” window, select the layout of columns and filters “Certification”.

2 Active “PROCESS: Create dates and certifications”, introducing the following re-

sponses:

Initial day: actual date

Day of certification: 31

Number of months: 12

In the months that have not 31 days, the latest possible date is created.

Delete a certification date

We will remove one of the dates of certification created.

1 In the “VIEW: Dates” window, choose “No certification” on the first date of certifi-

cation.

Indicate the current certification

1 Choose “Current certification” on any field in the third certification. Note that the

fields that identify change its color.

2 With the same system, choose as current the first certification, to continue the tuto-

rial.

Certification by certification lines

Create the first certification reusing estimate lines

We will certify the work item “E02EM030” of the chapter “01” from its estimate take-off

lines.

1 In the “Estimate” window, place the work item as active concept.

2 In the “Take-off lines” window select “Estimate and certification” layout.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 270

3 In “StageCert” field of the first take-off line select the value “1” to indicate that it was

made during the first certification.

4 Repeat this process for all take-off lines of explanation, selecting the lines and dis-

playing the list of stages once.

Stick with the first certification with different lines to the estimate

Then, we will certify the work item “E02AM010” of the chapter “01” through lines of

independent take-off lines of the estimate.

1 In the “Estimate” window, place the work item as active concept.

2 In the “Take-off lines” window select the layout “Certification”.

3 Enter the following take-off lines and select the value “1” in the “StageCert” field of

all:

Activity Comment N Length Width Height

Previous operations North zone 1 2,50 3,60

Previous operations Floor 1 7,50 2,90

Previous operations Path 1 3,00 1,75

Previous operations Irregular area 1 7,02

Previous operations Garden area 1 2,00 6,00

Print certification

1 Use “CALCULATIONS: Calculate all” to ensure that all amounts are updated.

2 Select “REPORTS: 05 Certifications: Certification with take-off lines” report. Answer

the questions and click “Preview”.

3 After checking the results, select “Print”.

Create the second certification

Let’s start the second certification of the work item “E02EM030”.

1 Certify as before all take-off lines corresponding to footings, indicating “2” in their

field “StageCert”.

2 In the “Dates” window, specify now that the current certification is the second.

Certify vby stages

We will certify typing the total quantity certified in the month.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 271

1 Place the work item “E02PM030” as the active concept.

2 Open the “Stages” subordinate window, “Certification” layout.

3 Enter 2.50 in the “QtyCert” for initial certification, 1.50 in the second and 2.90 in the

third.

4 Recalculate the project and observe the results in the “Dates” window.

Summary certification

We will print the summary with a low bid of 5%:

1 Open “VIEW: Project settings”, option “Calculate”.

2 Enter 0.95 in the low auction and accept.

To print the description:

3 Choose the report “05 Certification: Summary of certification”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 272

Cost tutorial This tutorial is a guide to estimate the project cost before bidding, purchasing man-

agement and calculation of their actual costs. In reality, each user wants to control dif-

ferent aspects and, therefore, should establish theirs own rules and procedures.

This tutorial assumes you are familiar with Presto Estimates.

The windows used in this tutorial are generally open from the “VIEW” menu or their

equivalents icons.

Before analysing the results or printing reports, calculate the project with

“CALCULATIONS: Calculate all” option.

Open the “CursoControl” project, found in the “Tutorial\ESP” directory.

1 Estimate of estimated cost

We will complete the data relative to the dates of the project.

1 Go to “Project settings: Times” window.

2 Fill in the start date with the first working day in April this year and the date of the

end of work any day in November and close the window.

3 Choose “PROCESS: Create dates and certifications”, type 8 in “Number of months”

and click “Accept”.

4 Open the “Dates” window, “Stages: Planning and certification” layout.

5 Choose “No certification” on the first two certifications.

6 Select as current certification the first, using “Current Certification” on that date,

and close the window.

7 Open the “Entities” window, “Data agents” layout.

8 Observe the existing agents and close the window.

Create a estimate of costs (target)

As the estimate is already calculated, we are going to create a proportional target to

the same.

1 Open the “Estimate” window, “Estimate and target” layout.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 273

2 Choose “PROCESS: Generate target”.

3 Verify that is chosen as a concept that will regenerate the root concept of the pro-

ject, CONTROL, and select “Generate target”.

4 Write 70 as a percentage in the four natures, and click “Accept”.

Note that the estimate quantities are copied unchanged to the target and that the pric-

es of the single components have the appropriate value.

Different decomposition in estimate and target

The composition of “E03ALA010 | Arqueta walk downspout” work item of the estimate

is not adequate, because we outsource the manpower providing us the material.

Annul the indicated amounts of target and add the last line, so that the decomposed

matches the following:

Observe the new price-target of the work item.

Reports of economic planning (target)

Preview the following reports under paragraph “01 Estimates and Take-off lines”, se-

lecting “4” value in response to the question “Price: 1 Est | 3 Real | 4 Tgt”

• “Decomposition list by chapters”.

• “Estimate and takeoff lines”.

Also use the report “Estimate and target” in “03 Financial planning”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 274

Accrue the target (planning)

We want to prevue the rhythm at which costs will produce of the project. We will use

an approximate time distribution, bell-as a Gaussian curve. We are going to fill in the

“WeightPlan” field, with the weight that each certification will have on the total amount

of the project.

1 Open the “VIEW: Dates”, “Stages: Planning” layout.

2 Select “WeightPlan” column by clicking in its header.

3 Press the suggest button on any of the selected fields, and choose the value of the

“Gaussian distribution” option.

4 In “PROCESS: Fill economic planning” check “Applying planning weights from each

certification” and accept.

5 In “Tree” window, access to “Planning” layout and select the level of work items in

the dropdown list top to the left.

6 In multiple fields should contain “QtyPlan” and “Plan” fields, and “1” in “Stage”

dropdown.

Check the monthly distribution of the estimated cost of each chapter and work item.

Note that the target is the sum of all the planned stages. When the project is in pro-

gress, is called planning to the sum until the current certification or approved stage.

Reports of economic planning (planning)

Preview the reports in “ 03 Economic Planning”:

• “Chapters and work items with stages”.

• “Quantities or amounts by months”.

• “Planning of revenues and costs”.

2 Purchases

Preparation of contracts.

Groups box

It automates the grouping of supplies in contracts and associate them default suppliers.

We will add a group for manpower to be subcontracted.

1 Open the project “Base de datos de proveedores” of the directory “Reference\ESP”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 275

2 Observe its structure; each chapter corresponds to one of the lots or purchasing

families on which will be subdivided the project.

3 Create the new chapter “S | SUBCONTRACTED MANPOWER”.

Associate groups suppliers

We will create two suppliers of manpower and associate to the previous chapter.

1 In the “Entities” window, “Data agents” layout, add:

Code Summary Email City PostalCode

40000031 Sumano sumano@tel.2-

inglés

Villaviciosa 28670

40000032 Álvaro Bautista Madrid 28001

2 In the “Estimate” window, insert the two suppliers as inferiors concepts of the chap-

ter created in the previous section.

3 Save your changes and close the groups table.

Choosing the concepts to purchase

The concepts that are going to be bought or subcontracted directly must be marked as

supplies.

1 In the “Estimate” window, choose “Supply” on the code of the first work item of

the first chapter.

2 Notice how the icon indicating the type of concept remains in orange.

3 Check as supply equally the remaining work items of the first, third and fourth chap-

ters, and the concepts of decomposition of the work items of the second and fifth

ones.

Associate the purchasing group to each concept

To make the process of sorting and searching of suppliers, each supply must be associ-

ated with a purchasing group.

1 Open the “Concepts” layout “Concepts for hire” window.

2 Choose “PROCESS: Fills in groups”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 276

3 Check “Master reference for groups”, and by “Suggest” button to the right select the

“Base de datos de proveedores” database, and click OK.

4 Observe that has filled the “Group” field of the different concepts.

5 To change the group of the concept “P01LT020 | Perforated brick”, press the suggest

button on its “Group” field and select “[E07] WALLS AND DIVISIONS”.

6 Repeat the process with the concept “P01LV105 | Brick face view”.

7 Assign the “O01” value to “Group” field of all concepts of manpower type, that are

not in the database of suppliers.

8 Replace “E02A”, “E02E”, “E02P” and “E02T” groups by “E02”, in order to the four con-

cepts later appear in a single contract.

9 Similarly, replace the groups ”E04C” and ”E04S” to “E04”.

Calculate the necessary resources to execute the project

This process is the basis for contract creation.

1 Choose “PROCESS: Calculate resources”.

2 Remove all but the options marked “For stages, grouped by” and “Purchasing

group”, and accept.

3 You can see the resources created in the “VIEW: Resources by groups” window.

Create contracts

Let’s create contracts that group the supplies needed to perform the project.

1 Open the “Contracts” window.

2 Choose “PROCESS: Create contracts”, uncheck “A contract by stage” and accept.

3 In the “Date” column of generated contracts type that they were created two months

before the start of the work.

4 Add “MANPOWER” as a description of the contract “O01”, that is not of the suppliers

database.

Contracts appears in red status, indicating that they are not satisfied, and therefore can-

not perform some calculations and do not appear in some reports.

Change the status of nonconforming contracts selecting “Black”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 277

Add suppliers to bid a contract

We will indicate the suppliers who we ask prices.

1 Choose “Search and associate suppliers” on any field of contract “E07 | WALLS

AND DIVISIONS”.

2 The first suppliers with more intense background come from the suppliers base and

the others are of the work itself. Check and uncheck the “Master reference for

groups” database to see the difference.

3 In the “Act” column, select the suppliers “40000003 | Insulation Castilla”, “40000004 |

Cecasa Ceramics” and “A82698762 | TECHNICAL CERAMICS Henares, SA”, and ac-

cept.

4 Notice in “Supplies” subject window the new columns that appear to the added

suppliers.

5 Repeat all steps associating suppliers to the listed contracts.

Contract Supplier Summary

E02 40000005 Desmontes Aguilera

40000006 Excavaciones del Monte

E04 40001101 Architectural concrete

40000011 Valcinsa

B80480304 ACERALIA PERFILES MADRID, S.L.

E05H 40001101 Architectural concrete

40000011 Valcinsa

A28403772 HORMIGONES DEL JARAMA, S.A.

Remove offers of a contract

We will remove a supplier of a contract.

1 Place in the “Supplies” subordinate window of the contract “E07 | WALLS AND

DIVISIONS”.

2 Choose “Eliminate bid” at the head of the column “Price”, supplier “A82698762”.

3 Note that the columns have disappeared from this offer.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 278

Modify supplies

Let’s modify the quantity to be contracted from a supply.

1 Go over the contract “O01 | MANPOWER”.

2 In “QtyTgt” field, enter 14.09 for supply “O01OA030 | First officer” and 9.64 for

“O01OA060 | Specialized pawn”.

Add clauses to a contract

We will complete the contract specifications with a text.

1 Place in the contract “S | SUBCONTRACTED MANPOWER”.

2 Open the subordinate window “Text” and type:

If the subcontractor fails to comply with the deadlines a penalty of 0.5 % of the initial

estimate for each day of delay will be applied.

Request prices to bidders

We will prepare the requests for prices to be sent to different bidders.

1 Select “FILE: Export: Price quote”.

2 In format, choose “Presto project” and accept.

3 In the directory labelled as “Destination” will have generated as many Presto projects

as suppliers involved in the contracts. If a supplier is involved in more than one, your

project will have a chapter for each contract.

If the supplier email figure in its field “Email” also generate an email with each bid,

which must be closing or saving one by one.

Importing received prices from suppliers in Presto format

The company Valcinsa has sent their prices for both contracts in which it participates.

We will proceed to import.

1 Select “FILE:Import: Price quote”.

2 Double click on the project “Supplier offer! 40000011”, located in the “Tutorial” di-

rectory.

3 Note that contracts “E04 “ and “E05H” have incorporated the prices offered by that

supplier.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 279

Input prices offered by suppliers manually

We assume that the remaining suppliers have submitted their bids by other means.

1 Change in the contract “E07” and indicate the prices submitted by each bidder for

each supply.

Summary

Price

40000003

Price

40000004

Face brick 92,00 85,00

Perforated brick 35,00 40,00

2 Repeat this operation on contracts “E02”, “E04” and “E05H” with the following prices,

respectively.

Summary

Price

40000005

Price

40000006

Transport to landfill 8,26 7,53

Excavating machine wells 10,97 10,00

Excavating machine emptying 10,55 9,62

Clearing and land clearing 0,38 0,35

Summary

Price

40000011

Price

40001101

Price

B80480304

Pitching limestone 4,43 4,77 5,03

Reinforced concrete slab 11,32 12,19 11,60

Reinforced concrete footings 92,70 99,83 92,37

Concrete cleaning 61,86 66,62 67,11

Summary

Price

40000011

Price

40001101

Price

A28403772

Forged inclined deck 19,67 22,78 22,71

Reinforced concrete slabs on grade 222,21 257,29 240,57

Forged double beam 30,62 35,45 34,80

Reinforced concrete bands 340,09 393,79 368,70

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 280

Reinforced concrete in beams 392,37 454,32 421,78

Reinforced concrete pillar 162,59 188,27 177,93

Remember to calculate all to update the results.

Award the contract to a supplier

To complete the hiring process is necessary to decide its contractor.

1 In the “Supplier” field of the “Contracts” window click “Suggest” button of the con-

tract “E07” to see your suppliers.

2 Select the supplier “40000004” and accept.

3 Repeat the above steps assigning to the supplier “40000006” the contract “E02” and

to the supplier “40000011” the contracts “E04” and “E05H”.

Prepare the order

1 Choose “Transfer to order” over “E07” contract. “P0001”, “P0002”, “P0003” and

“P0004” orders are created for their supplier, with the supplies to the offered price.

An order is generated for each stage in which supplies are needed.

2 Open the “Orders” window and delete the orders “P0002”, “P0003” and “P0004”,

which so far are not going to perform.

3 Press the suggest button on “Date” to indicate that the order is placed on 12 March.

Reports of contracting and purchasing

Preview the reports in “07 Procurement” section:

• “Comparative contracts”.

• “Contracts signed”.

• “Concepts contracted and orders”.

• “Firm orders”.

3 Invoices

Documents of economic management.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 281

Record an invoice and their supplies

We receive “00342” invoice for “40000006 | Mount Excavations” supplier and dated

March 22. We will note including the detail:

1 Open the “Invoices” window and enter the main elements of the invoice:

Document Entity Summary Date

00342 40000006 Excavaciones del Monte 22/03

2 In the “Suppliers” window, type the detail of the invoice:

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price IVA

E02AM010 Clearing and land clearing 61,52 m2 0,35 18

E02EM030 Excavating machine emptying 48,08 m3 9,62 18

E02PM030 Excavating machine wells 6,93 m3 10,00 18

E02TT040 Transport to landfill 143,00 m3 7,53 18

The VAT fee of the invoice is calculated depending on each supply.

Warranty withholding

Complete the invoice indicating your warranty withholding, writing “5” in its field “With-

ldngWarr”.

The withholding amount is subtracted from the value of the “BaseInv” field.

Add maturities

The invoice “Amount” field is red, indicating its amount does not match the maturities

sum. Let’s create a maturity.

Choose “Maturity 60” on any field of the invoice.

Open the subordinate window “Maturities”. Make sure that you create:

• Amount to be paid 60 days after the date of invoice.

• Warranty withholding with date 1 year later the invoice date.

• VAT fee dated 20/04.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 282

Mark maturity as paid

Note that the red color is due (unpaid) .

Choose “ Black” on the “Note” field of “Maturity 60” (paid).

Complete the example

We proceed to type more invoices for completing the example.

1 Enter the same manner the following invoices.

Document Entity Summary Date

G2456 40000011 Valcinsa 19/04

G4758 40000011 Valcinsa 28/04

00074 40000004 Cecasa Cerámicas 11/05

M0027 46000001 Own manpower 12/05

X00345 40000304 Hardware Fermax 14/05

2 In the same order, enter each supplies.

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price

E04CM040 Concrete cleaning 1,24 m2 61,86

E04CA060 Reinforced concrete footings 5,99 m3 92,70

E04SA020 Reinforced concrete slab 108,00 m3 11,32

E04SE020 Pitching limestone 108,00 m3 4,43

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price

E05HSA010 Reinforced concrete pillar 5,44 m3 162,59

E05HVA030 Reinforced concrete in beams 16,74 m3 392,37

E05HVA075 Reinforced concrete bands 7,20 m3 340,09

E05HFA060 Forged double beam 240,00 m2 30,62

E05HLA070 Reinforced concrete slabs on grade 0,90 m3 222,21

E05HFS160 Forged inclined deck 124,23 m2 19,67

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 283

P01LT020 Perforated brick 0,20 mud 40,00

P01LV105 Face brick 10,00 mud 85,00

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price

O01OB050 Official brick maker 200,00 h. 10,47

O01OB060 Assistant brick maker 100,00 h. 9,82

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price

PX003 Tree level 2,00 unit 17,00

PX002 Acrylic silicone pot 12,00 unit 4,00

PX001 Steel nails 20,00 kg 11,50

Note in this last invoice that can be invoiced not previously existing concepts in the

estimate.

3 Create the maturities of each invoice with contextual menu and the type indicated in

the table.

Document Entity Summary Type of maturity

G2456 40000011 Valcinsa Maturity 30

G4758 40000011 Valcinsa Maturity 30

00074 40000004 Cecasa Cerámicas Maturity 60

M0027 46000001 Own manpower Maturity in cash

X00345 40000304 Hardware Fermax Maturity in cash

Invoices issued to customers

We will issue to the customer the invoice corresponding to the first certification.

1 Look in the “Entities” window, “Agents data” layout there is the concept “43000015 |

Promotions ESUCAP” and its type is “Developer”.

2 Access the “Invoices” window, “Customers” layout.

3 As we have seen above, create “0045” invoice for “43000015 | Promotions ESUCAP”

developer, dated “30/4”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 284

4 Enter the following supply:

Code Summary Price

CERT1 Certification nº 1 2.000,00

5 Complete the example with the following invoices:

Document Entity Summary Date

0065 43000015 Promociones ESUCAP 31/05

0074 43000015 Promociones ESUCAP 30/06

6 And the following supplies, respectively.

Code Summary Price

CERT2 Certification nº 2 20.000,00

CERT3 Certification nº 3 8.000,00

7 Enter maturities in cash at all.

Pro forma invoices

We will introduce a forecast invoice.

1 Type the following invoice:

Document Entity Summary Date

PRO5 43000015 Promociones ESUCAP 31/07

2 With the following supply:

Code Summary Price

CERT4 Certification nº 4 8.000,00

3 Choose “Net” on the “Document” field of the invoice, indicating that it is a pro

forma invoice.

Remember to recalculate the project.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 285

Record the payment of a maturities group

The window “VIEW: Maturities” shows all the projects maturities.

We will indicate that the above maturity to July 1 have been paid.

1 Open the “VIEW: Maturities” window and check that it is sorted by date.

2 Select all maturities with before the July 1 date.

3 Choose “Black” on the “Note” field of any of the selected lines.

4 Press “CALCULATIONS: Calculate all”.

Analyse amounts by dates

In the “Diary” window, “Invoicing” layout, you can see the invoicing in each date and

making annotations.

1 In the ”Description” field of the March 12 type:

First firm orders

2 Click on the “Text” icon in the toolbar and type:

Received contracts from various suppliers. They accept the requirements. We spent the

first orders.

Analyse the accounts state of the suppliers

In the “Entities” window, “Suppliers (amounts)” and “Promoters (amounts)” layouts

show the economic information from suppliers or customers, and the invoiced amount,

retained, paid, unpaid and VAT.

By clicking on the “Supplies” icon, in the icon bar of the window, you can see the de-

tailed list of supplies.

Analyse the purchases of a concept

The “Concepts” layout “Supplies” window shows the concepts that supply type in the

work.

By clicking on the “Supplies” icon in the window icons bar, you can see the detailed list

of concept supplies.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 286

Studying the project supplies

The window “VIEW: Supplies” shows the items that are in any document, where you can

sort and filter by different criteria.

It also allows you to change some data without opening the corresponding document.

Reports of invoices and maturities

Preview reports of “08 Invoicing” section:

• “Invoices and maturities”.

• “Invoices by suppliers”.

• “Maturities by dates”.

4 Orders and deliveries

Presto has documents of order type and of delivery type or delivery note. Its use is op-

tional, and its operation is similar to the invoice document type, except the part con-

cerning to maturities.

Ordering

We will create an order manually, independent of the contracts.

1 Open the “Orders” window and close all others.

2 In the first empty line, type “PX0103” in the “Document” field.

3 Press the suggest button on “Entity” and choose “40000001”.

4 Then enter its “Date” issue is “24/02”.

5 In “Supplies” press the suggest button over “Code” of each supply, select successive-

ly:

Code Unit Summary Quantity Price

A02A080 m3 Cement mortar 10,00 44,80

P01HA020 m3 Concrete HA-25/P/40/I 0,14 51,01

6 Display the order you just prepared with “REPORTS: 07 Contract: Firm orders”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 287

Note the complete delivery of an order

Concrete Horminasa delivery a week later all supplies of the order accompanied by a

delivery note:

1 Choose “Goto delivery” over the order “PX0103”.

2 Type “EX0103” as code of the delivery.

3 Open the “Deliveries” window and watch the delivery was created.

4 Change the date of delivery so that it is “05/03”.

5 Notice in the “Order” field of the “Supplies” its provenance.

Complete the example

Several days after we send “40000001 | Concrete Horminasa” a new order in which we

ask the rest of the material we need.

1 Type the order “PX0104” for the previous entity, dated “08/03”.

2 Enter the following supplies.

Code Summary Quantity Unit Price

A02A080 Cement mortar 5,17 m3 44,80

P01AA020 River sand 2,73 m3 10,99

P01HM020 Mass concrete HM-20/P/40/I 0,16 m3 49,01

P01MC010 Cement mortar M-100 0,11 m3 37,10

P01MC040 Cement mortar M-40 0,22 m3 32,90

Note the partial delivery of an order

“Concrete Horminasa” sends two days after a truck with sand. To record the receipt of

this material:

1 Choose “Transfer to delivery order” on the supply “P01AA020 | River sand” on the

order “PX0104”.

2 Type “EX0104” as code of the delivery.

3 Open the “Deliveries” window and change its date to “10/03”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 288

Results

• Open the “Diary” window, “Documents” layout and check the amounts by date.

• Open the “Entities” window, “Suppliers amounts” layout, and check the amounts

ordered and delivered.

Delivery reports

Preview reports of “08 Invoicing” section:

• “Deliveries by date”.

• “Deliveries by suppliers”.

5 Calculation of actual costs

The cost calculation is from the supplies listed in cost documents (deliveries and / or

invoices), the designated destinations and the production of the work items.

Designation of destinations

The first step before proceeding to study of actual cost of the project is to determine

which units will be produced (destinations or cost centers) with purchased supplies. We

will mark the first chapter as a destination:

1 Open the “Estimate” window and close all other open windows.

2 Choose “Destination” on the code of the concept “01 | EARTHMOVING”. Notice

that nature “NatC” changes its color.

3 Repeat the previous step for all the chapters and work items of the chapters “02 |

SANITATION” and “ 05 | ENCLOSURE”.

Consumption of subcontracted work items

We have outsourced some work items that we will allocate its chapter.

1 Open the invoice 00342, supplier “40000006 | Mount Excavations.”

2 Press the suggest button of the field “Destination” of its supply “E02AM010 | Land

clearing and cleaning”.

3 Select the destination “01 | EARTHMOVING” and type “03/04” as the date of alloca-

tion.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 289

4 In the “Estimate” window, “Cost control” layout, open the decomposition of chapter

01.

5 Choose “CALCULATIONS: Real costs” and note the quantity and amount allocated in

the “QtyInput” and “AmntInput” fields respectively.

6 Assign to the supplies of the invoices “00342”, “G2456” and “G4758” the destinations

and allocation dates as follow, respectively:

Code Summary Path Summary DateAm

nt

E02AM010 Clearing and land clearing 01 LANDS MOVING 03/04

E02EM030 Excavating machine emptying 01 LANDS MOVING 05/04

E02PM030 Excavating machine wells 01 LANDS MOVING 05/04

E02TT040 Transport to landfill 01 LANDS MOVING 08/04

Code Summary Path Summary DateAm

nt

E04CM040 Concrete cleaning 03 FOUNDATIONS 21/04

E04CA060 Reinforced concrete footings 03 FOUNDATIONS 21/04

E04SA020 Reinforced concrete slab 03 FOUNDATIONS 22/04

E04SE020 Pitching limestone 03 FOUNDATIONS 25/04

Code Summary Path Summary DateAm

nt

E05HSA010 Reinforced concrete pillar 04 Structures 28/04

E05HVA030 Reinforced concrete in beams 04 Structures 29/04

E05HVA075 Reinforced concrete bands

E05HFA060 Forged double beam 04 Structures 19/05

E05HLA070 Reinforced concrete slabs on

grade

04 Structures 19/05

E05HFS160 Forged inclined deck 04 Structures 24/05

7 Recalculate and observe the amounts allocated to each chapter.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 290

Cost calculation until the current certification

1 In “VIEW: Project settings: Calculations”, check “Consider only documents in ap-

proved stages” option, so it does not take in account the supplies allocations with

later date to the current certification.

2 Note that the work items allocated to chapter “04 | STRUCTURES” during the month

of May have not been accounted.

3 Open the “Dates” window, “Stages: Planning and certification” layout.

4 Choose the second certification as “Current certification” and note that they are al-

ready counted.

Allocate one part of a supply

The supply “E05HVA075 | Reinforced concrete bands”, that have bought in the G4758

invoice has not yet been allocated, and we want to reflect that is placed 1 m3 at the

end of April and the other on May 10 .

1 Open the invoice G4758 of “40000011 | Valcinsa” supplier.

2 Choose “Unfold” over “E05HVA075” supply.

3 Enter “6.20” as the quantity to unfold. A new supply appears with a quantity of 6.20

m3 and the previous will be reduced its quantity in the same amount.

4 Select “04 | STRUCTURES” as a destination for both supplies and indicate that the old

with a quantity of 1 m3 has been placed on “30/04” and the new with the rest on

“10/05”.

Recalculate and verify that there is not difference between supply consumed at one

time and this, that is consumed in several.

Consumption of basics concepts

The mechanism that will continue for the allocation of basic concepts is the same as

that followed for the allocation of outsourced work items.

1 Open the invoice M0027 of supplier “46000001 | Own manpower”.

2 Assign to your supplies the destination “E07LSB040 | Factory perforated brick” and

the date of allocation “30/05”.

3 In the “Estimate” window, “Cost control” layout, open the breakdown of the previous

work item, in “ 05 | CLOSING” chapter.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 291

Recalculate and observe the amount of imputed supplies.

Analyse the allocations of a destination

In the “Concepts” layout “Destination” window are all concepts of target type.

Click the “Allocations” icon in the icon bar of the window to see the supplies allocated

to each destination.

Enter the production of certifiable work items

We assume that output equals the certification.

1 Choose “PROCESS: Copy certifications”.

2 Select “Certification” as “Origin”, “Execution” as “Destination” and accept in order to

the “QtyReal” field of the work items is same as “QtyCert”. In “Masked” type *, and

accept.

3 Type 115.00 in the “QtyReal” field of the “E07LSB040 | Factory of perforated brick”

work item, which is not certified.

Recalculate and note that the unitary actual yield of the officer and assistant appears,

considering purchases each and the produced quantity of the work item.

Cost control reports

Preview the following reports under paragraph “01 Estimates and Take-off lines”, se-

lecting the value “3” in response to the question “Price:1 Est | 3 Real | 4 Tgt”

• “Decomposition list by chapters”.

• “Estimate and takeoff lines”.

Preview reports in “09 Cost analysis”:

• Allocations to cost centers. Check variants of this report, showing the aggregat-

ed supply and filter by date imputation.

• “Valuation of stocks”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 292

Design report This section contains the instructions to customize existing reports or create new ones.

Common options with Presto explained in the chapters to Presto.

Contents of reports

Reports can incorporate any estimate information:

• Elements of either table.

• General data, which are in “Project settings”.

• Any other value of the “Variables” window.

A report is a set of instructions for selection, organization and format of the infor-

mation to be printed of the estimate, structured in controls.

The controls are rectangles and can contain a fixed text, an estimate field, a calculated

value, images or lines. Controls are grouped into sections.

A section is a horizontal band that contains controls with information usually obtained

from a Presto same table. The “Header” section, for example, indicates the contents of

the top of each page of the report, while the “Element” sections fill the central zone of

the page.

The information in each section is linked to the previous section by establishing a rela-

tionship between them.

Link tables

To design a report you have to choose the table that contains the desired information

and associate that table to a section. Using a single table simple reports are obtained,

such as lists of materials or supplies.

To make reports with related data between two tables, as the list of concepts and the

files associated with each, you must open each table in successive “Element” sections.

The table of one section must share some information with the table of the following.

The program prints each element of the table selected in one section and then all ele-

ments of the table of the next section whose key satisfies the mask input to choose this

table. Thus, the element for each section acts as header or title of the elements of the

next section.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 293

In the example of the concepts and their associated files the sections are:

Sección Table Key Mask

Element 1 Concepts Concepts.Code

Element 2 Attach-

mentConcept

AttachmentConcept.Code Concepts.Code

Presto starts printing an element of section 1; then print all the elements of section 2

related with the element of the section 1, until completion of all elements in each of the

sections.

A table can also be chained itself; for example, the relations table can be opened suc-

cessive times to print nested hierarquical layouts.

Properties

The properties of the report, sections and controls are in “Design Report: VER: Proper-

ties”.

The expressions are written according to the rules that are in “Expression builder”.

Paste

It inserts in the point of the report where the cursor is located the clipboard content,

which may be the controls of the same or another report:

• If some control was selected before pasting, it does not eliminate or replace it.

• If in the destination report is selected a section, paste it all the controls. Other-

wise, each control paste in its original section. In the absence of this, it paste in

the last section that it pasted something.

If in any property of a control there is a non-existing variable in the target report, re-

mains in blank and a message appears.

File

Save protected copy

It saves the active report so that it can be used normally, but without seeing or chang-

ing its design. A protected report cannot be unprotected, so you should save a copy of

the original report.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 294

Translate report

It makes a similar process to described in “Translate text”, translating the literals that be

in the expressions of:

• The property “Source” of the text boxes.

• The “Question” column in the “Settings” window.

The multi-language reports using the “tr()” function are translated leaving the literal

corresponding to the destination language.

Text strings that contain numbers are not translated.

It has its own dictionary in RTF format allowing you to customize the translation using

terms that the user wants.

After the translation, the user decides if saves the report.

VER

List of controls

It lists all the controls of the report, or only selected, with the section to which they be-

long and the contents of the “Source” field. Under each control appear all that depend

on it, with “Section” field empty.

You can activate one or more controls by double clicking on the list, which facilitates

the location of the selected element.

Field list

Table with all Presto fields and the table to which they belong. You can drag a field

from this list to the report, creating a control that appears with the adequate width to

its content.

Decrease zoom 25%

Decreases the display size of the report.

Zoom 100%

It displays the design of the report at its natural size.

Increase zoom 25%

Increase the display size of the report.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 295

Properties

If define the characteristics of the report, sections or controls. It also opened by double-

clicking on the element. If selected various controls, it can be changed all at once their

common properties.

Colors

The colors can be chosen in the dialog box or by entering the RGB color, which are the

red, green and blue components of a color additive system. Each index ranges from 0

to 255 and the number is calculated by the expression:

R + (G x 256) + (B x 256 x 256)

Report properties

To see them, you click outside the report area.

Width

Width of the printed area of the report in cm. You can also move the right edge of the

report.

Grid X and Y

Number of vertical and horizontal grid divisions, measuring 1 x 1 cm.

Orientation

This orientation automatically changes the orientation of the printer to print the report.

Columns

You can choose more than one column for reports to be printed in large formats or

oblong. The report design should have proper width to resulting width of each column.

Repeat header and foot

In reporting more than one column, the header and footer can be printed once per

page or repeated for each column.

Common properties of sections

Height

Height in cm of the section. You can also move its lower edge.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 296

Background style

The contents of the master page is printed below each section. If you would not be

printed in a specific section, do its bottom visible, even white.

Keep together

It applies to sections “Element”, “Search “, “Separator”, “Separator end”, “End element”

and “Final”.

Option behaviour when the end of the page

No What cannot be, goes to the next page.

The section If the section does not fit on the page, it passes complete to the

next.

With inferior ones Only “Element” section. If the element and their inferiors not fit

on the page, turn the whole to the next page.

Jump before | Jump after

Applies to “Start”, “Separator “, “Element”, “Separator end”, “End element” and “Final”.

It specify a condition to generate a page break before or after printing the section.

Browse not

All sections except “Master page” and “Search”.

It links to the section the contents of the “Search” section of the indicated number.

Adjustment

It adjusts the contents of the section to the upper or lower limit of the page. It affects

all sections except master page header and footer.

Properties of the “Element” section

Condition

If it’s matched, it jumps to the “Element” section listed in the “Element No.” property,

leaving unprinted the lower intermediate, if any.

Element nº

Section “Element” which is skipped if the annotated expression is fulfilled in “Condi-

tion”.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 297

Table

Table of the Presto project that is opened with the section.

Key

Key of the table for which the elements are arranged in the section field.

Mask

It applies to the key field to filter the elements that are printed. If alphanumeric must be

quoted and supports wildcards “*” and “?”.

Selection

It lets filtering the elements to be printed by a Presto expression.

Element end

It is printed at the end of the section that closes to print totals or summaries.

Separator | Separator end

It groups the elements of the section by the first characters of the key, creating a

“Separator” section and a “Separator End” one, before and after the group.

Separator characters

Number of characters of the key by which the elements are grouped when there are

separators. You can use the following special cases:

Value Type Groups by

1 Date Days

-1 Date Months

-2 Date Years

-3 Concept Nature

Order by

Sort criteria, which may be a field in the table, a text box or an expression. The sort by

default is by the key field and is not needed to record. Sorting by other criteria may

result in slower execution of the report.

Common properties of controls

The controls move one grid unit at each press of the cursor.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 298

Name

The name of the new controls is formed by the control type and a number. It can be

changed later; must begin with a letter and can also use numbers and characters “$”

and “_”.

You cannot use the reserved names, as the fields of work, function names and language

structures.

Visible

It lets calculating auxiliary variables, which generate a required value in the report, but

not wish to print. The non-visible controls occupy space on the printed report, unless

the condition below is not met.

Condition

If the condition is not met, control is not printed or occupies space.

“Text box” control properties

Autoextensible

If the text to include does not fit in the rectangle box and the “Yes” answer is selected,

width control is maintained, but the number of lines is increased as needed.

Origin

Presto expression indicating what to print in control.

Numerical results are printed with all decimal places, without thousands separators.

This result can be formatted using a format to this same field with the ‘%’ function, as

described in the “Expression builder”, or with the criteria of the “Format” field.

Font

Choose type and font size available on the computer.

Number format

Decimal positions

Number of decimal places with which the variable is printed.

Sign +

It adds the “+” character when the value of the variable is positive.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 299

Thousands separator

It prints the thousands separator, according to the operating system regional.

Words

It converts a number to its string expression in words in the language displayed in

“VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous” or in Roman numerals.

Gender

Male or female gender of the value in letter of the variable.

Caps

It displays the value in uppercase letter of the variable.

Alphanumerical format

The alphanumeric expressions are printed within the text box:

• The maximum allowable width in all predefined variables, except in the texts.

• The width corresponding to the real text in the texts.

• The corresponding width to the assigned value for user-defined variables.

Delete white space

It removes whitespace characters by the end of the text.

Caps | Mins

It prints this variable in uppercase, lowercase, or as is.

Words

Automatic hyphenation of words.

RTF format

It prints the text as formatted, unchanged, except it takes in account the state of the

hyphenation option.

Date format

A date type variable is internally the number of Julian days or correlative since January

1, 1980. The date format option allows you to convert this number to a date as you

want to print it.

Text

It lets you choose a standard format of date in a list.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 300

If another format is desired, we can write a string expression, where the characters

shown in the following table have special meaning:

Format Description

D, M, Y Day, month or year, figures, omitting zeros by the left.

DD, MM, YY Day, month or year, in numbers with two digits.

DDD, MMM, YYY Day, month or year, in letter.

MMMM If the language is Catalan, month in letters and preceded by “d ‘“ when

necessary.

Mn Month in letter, with n initial characters.

Dr, Mr, Yr Day, month or year in roman numerals.

Ym Year in numbers and a thousand separator.

The characters not included in the table are printed unchanged.

For example, the expression:

MMM DD Y

Generates printing:

05 de Marzo de 2003

Alternatively you can use the formatting function of dates:

%(format)f’(numeric expression of date)

The term “format” functions as the aforementioned “Text” box. For example:

´%(D de MMM de Y)f´(today)

Results:

5 de Marzo de 2003

Adjustments

Justifying

The “General” justification aligns the numbers on the right and type variables and al-

phanumeric date to the left.

The justification “None” respects the indented applied to text.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 301

Fill in

Character that will fill the gap between the control box and its contents, if it does not

fully occupied.

Calculation

It lets setting variables to perform a calculation on the expression of the “Source” prop-

erty of the text box.

Operation

It calculates the sum, average, maximum or minimum of the control listed in the

“Source” property of the control. It’s used habitually in “End element” or “Final” sec-

tions.

Element nº

Number of element that will perform the operation.

When printing

When selected the “Source” option, only do the specified operation if the element that

applies has been really printed. It may happen that the element has been travelled by

the report, but not printed yet, because it does not fit on the page. Thus the correct

result of the operation in special sections, such as footer, is obtained.

Select “No” option for the transaction as soon as the element is crossed by the report,

whether or not printed.

Reset End element

It resets the value of the variable when you run the “End element” indicated.

Reset End separator

It resets the variable value when you execute the indicated “Separator End”.

Reset page break

It resets the value of the variable when a page break occurs.

Browse not

Section “Search” on which will perform the operation.

Condition

The calculation is performed only on the concepts that meet this condition.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 302

“Line” control properties

Inclination

Las distintas posibilidades "|", "-", "/" and "\", fuerzan la orientación de la línea.

Page break

It inserts a page break along the line, with different options. You can include a condi-

tion in the corresponding property.

Control Properties “Rectangle”

Background style

You can choose a visible or invisible background.

“Graphic” control properties

Origin

Provenance of the chart.

Options Description

File Image file in any graphics supported format.

Thumbnail Thumbnail of the associated file.

Image Graphical representation of the associated file.

First image First attached file of type image.

First drawing First associated file of vectorial type.

Campo Represented by a graph, as natures.

File

Origin = File

Filename with the graph. The graph is stored in the report, so it is not necessary to re-

tain the original file.

Origin = Field

Presto Name field represented by the graph.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 303

Self adjusting size

If enabled, the control size increases to the size of the graph, moving the controls or

following sections, if necessary. It is useful for reports with images or drawings associ-

ated to the project concepts.

“Gantt” control properties

It takes into account various conditions of display of the Gantt chart in that moment in

Presto. The following properties, except “Header”, are common to the entire report.

Header

Display the time scale of the diagram.

Start date

Date, in the format supported by Presto, from which diagram printing starts.

mm / time unit

Mm of width assigned to each column of the unit of time.

Helps to adjust the position of the controls

Ruler

Horizontal and vertical rulers in the report design. It allows multiple selections of ele-

ments.

Grid

It displays a grid on the report layout that helps to align the controls. Report properties

“X Grid” and “Y Grid” indicates the number of subdivisions per unit grid.

EDIT: Snap to Grid

It sets to grid subdivisions the operations on controls and sections that affect their po-

sition or size, even if the grid is not visible.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 304

Parameters (questions)

List of user-definable questions that are presented to preview, print or export the re-

port.

Property Description

Variable Variable that takes the value of the response, with the same rules as the

names of controls.

The type of the variable depends on the content of “Answer”.

Question Text of question to ask.

It may be included questions in the program different languages, and each

must be separated by “;” and in the following order:

Spanish;Catalan;English;French; <Internal> ; Portuguese; German; <Inter-

nal>;Italian;Polish

Length Maximum number of characters in the response.

Mys Automatic change to caps of the response.

Answer Default value, which also affects the type of the variable.

The alphanumeric responses must be quoted; if you want an alphanumeric

variable with not default value, enter ““.

If you want a drop down list of alphanumeric responses, enter the options

separated by “;”.

If there is a text box called “Help”, its contents are displayed when you run the report,

along with the questions, and in the project language.

Go up the parameter | Go down the parameter

Alter the order of the questions.

Tools

Allows selection of a control to create or add content to the layout of the report. The

coordinates of each control can be seen at the bottom of the window.

Select

Select one or more controls.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 305

Textbox

It creates a control to print a field variable, expression or fixed text.

Line

It creates a control that prints a line.

Rectangle

It creates a control that prints a rectangle.

Image

It creates a control for printing images or associated drawings, or a separate graphic

file.

Gantt

It creates a control to print a bar or a header in a Gantt chart.

Format controls

Copy control format

It converts the chosen control formatting properties in those of the defect.

Paste format to the control

It applies the default properties of the selected controls.

Align

It aligns the selected controls.

Adjust size

By choosing “Adjust to content”, if the control is a text box, set the height to font size; if

a graph from a file, set its size.

Bring to front

It locates the selected controls ahead of other overlapping ones.

Bring to back

It locates the selected controls behind the overlapping others.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 306

Section

Insert

It insert an “Element” or “Searching” section in front of the chosen section.

Master page

It prints a common background or watermark on all pages of the report, except in the

“Prologue” and “Epilogue” sections; the content of the other sections is printed on it.

Prologue

It’s printed at the beginning of the report and then a page break is inserted.

Header

Its contents are printed at the top of each page, except in the pages of the sections

“Prologue” and “Epilogue”.

Start

It prints exclusively on the top of the first page of the report.

Element

You can print a record in a table of Presto. For example, a “Concepts.Code” control,

without any conditions, prints a line for each item of the table, with your code.

The chained of “Element” sections let printing the information from successive nested

hierarchies of concepts. After each top-level element all lower elements are printed,

and so on. You can view an example: “Annex I. Technical documentation: Tables”.

You can also concatenate “Element” sections associated to other tables, to print the

concepts and their take-off lines, suppliers and their supplies, invoices and their maturi-

ties, etc.

Each “element” section it’s possible add sections “End element”, “Separator” and “End

separator”.

See “Properties of the Element section” to see the various ways to select and sort the

elements.

Final

It prints once at the end of the report, to incorporate end comments, totals or signa-

tures.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 307

Foot

Is printed at the bottom of each page, except in the “Prologue” and “Epilogue” sections.

Epilogue

It is printed at the end of the report on a separate page after the “Final” section.

Browse

It’s associated to a Presto table and links to another section of the report. It prints once

for each record in the selected table and works similarly to the “Element” section.

It serves to nest data more flexibility than in the “Element” sections. For example, to

print invoices with theirs supplies can be used two “Element” sections; but if you want

to print on each invoice the maturities after the supplies, an “Element” section is not

helpful, as it seeks the maturities of supplies, that do not exist. To do this, add a

“Browse” section with the maturities data instead of the third section “Element”.

A “Browse” section is linked to a section of any kind, except to another “Browse” sec-

tion, selecting the number in the “Browse Number” dropdown list of the properties of

the section that is linked. The generated lines by the “Browse” section is printed after

each element in the section that is linked.

“Browse” section has the properties “Table”, “Key”, “Mask”, “Selection” and “Adjust-

ment”, which works as the “Element” section, and “Element number”, indicating the

desired record of the table; if null, through all the records.

You can open as many “Searching” sections as desired, but can only link one per sec-

tion.

The operations on “Searching” sections automatically restarted its value each time is

linked to the “Search” section.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 308

Expression builder The expressions are used to create user fields, reports, filters and rules from the values

of existing fields.

• The expressions are written using C language conventions, except where indi-

cated otherwise.

• The decimal separator is always the point.

The left window shows all fields, classified by tables, together with operators and func-

tions, with examples.

General variables

Variables in the working environment of the user.

Functions

Double-clicking on the name of a function is inserted into the edit box. Then the formal

parameters must be replaced by real ones.

By selecting “Functions: Numerics” and “abs” is written:

abs(num)

Select the contents of brackets and choosing a field, eg “Concepts.Est”, you get:

abs (Concepts.Est)

Operators

A los operadores estándar del lenguaje C se añaden algunos, como el operador "*?",

que permite comprobar rápidamente si una expresión satisface una máscara, and el de

exponenciación, "^".

Filters

It lets select predefined filters.

To enable multiple simultaneous filters should be concatenated using “&&” (logical

“and”) or “ | | “ (logical “or”).

Fields and expressions

It allows use user columns and other predefined expressions, that are saved with the

“Save as” option.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 309

Project fields

The list of Presto tables with all fields.

You can also see on Presto Reports, “VIEW: Field list” option. The “Type” column indi-

cates the values supported as answer.

Type Variable Comment

A Alphanumeric The number indicates the maximum number of characters.

N Numeric Any numerical value.

F Date Format “DD/MM/YYYY”

B Boolean 0: No 1: Yes

C Character One character.

The fields in these tables are identified in expressions using the table name and field

name, separated by point.

Concepts.Description

Fields root concept

Fields of work accessible “VIEW: Project settings: Data”, belong to the root concept and

used by the expression:

Concepts[Nat== 0].[field]

Concepts[Nat==0].Description

Variables fields of the project

The predefined fields of work contained in “VIEW: Variables” belong to the “Work” ta-

ble, and are used as the other tables:

Work.Period

Estos campos and los creados por el usuario, or por respuestas dadas a los informes

and asistentes and procesos automáticos de conexión con otros programas, también se

pueden identificar con las funciones "work( )" and "workd( )" para textos and números,

respectivamente.

Example Result

work(“Tax”) IVA

workd(“Period”) 11

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 310

Fields reports

Report variables

Specific properties of the report, such as the number of the page being printed. It start

with an underscore.

Parameters (questions)

Variables that ask the user before running the report.

Text boxes

It lets using the value of other text boxes in the report.

Fields of the table

When opened from a section of a report, only are displayed the most appropriate fields

to the selected information.

Linked variables

You may refer to a field of an item in a table without specifically open, whenever a field

element of the original table is key in the other.

This syntax is used:

Table1[ Key1==Table2.Key2].Variable

For example, “CodSup” table “Relationships” key matches the key “code” of “concepts”

table. Therefore, for the above summary of the present concept can be used the ex-

pression:

Concepts [Code == Relations.CodSup ] .Abstract

Manual formatting of fields

To display a field as shown in Presto, the prefix “%” is used.

The result becomes alphanumeric, can therefore not be used as a numerical expression

in other calculated fields.

Other formats

It may apply to other formats with “%” function, applied to an expression in parenthe-

ses, as follows:

'% [Flags] [width [.decimales]] in ‘(expression)

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 311

Flags Meaning

z Fill with zeros by the left.

m Thousands separator.

+ Positive sign, if any (the negative is always printed)

b Blank for null values, instead of “0”.

Width refers to the total number of characters.

Example Alphanumeric results

'% 10n ‘(1234.567) 1234,567

'% 10.2n ‘(1234.567) 1234,57

'% z10n ‘(1234.567) 001234,567

'% m10n ‘(1234.567) 1.234,567

'% + 10n ‘(1234.567) +1234,567

'% 10n ‘(0) 0

'%b10n’(0)

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 312

Link to Excel and Access The import format described in “Service request” web of Presto, “Connecting with other

programs: Word and Excel connection” section.

Excel

Import

Import an Excel workbook, you must have the same structure and format as the result

of the “FILE: Export: Excel”.

Export

Generates a spreadsheet in Excel format:

• With data from one or two pricing structures.

• With different levels of decomposition.

• With take-off lines and texts.

The resulting sheet can be modified and import back to Presto, while its structure is

respected.

Features:

• Calculated fields contain formulas and highlighted in yellow.

• Locked published in red and the value is exported, not the formula.

• Prices in other currencies are converted into the currency of the work.

• The column values of measurements obtained in specific columns, to allow gen-

eration of comparative and to facilitate import.

• The result of the take-off lines formulas exported as a number, but the formula

is exported as text.

• Decomposition concepts cancelled or blocked price, or lines corresponding to

amounts cancelled in any of the pricing structures to export measurement is not

exported.

• The tabs are replaced by spaces.

Presto advanced resources, including indirect costs, lengthy texts, or not supported by

Excel as tables within text cells are not supported.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 313

Export Presto windows to Excel

Export layout to Excel

Exports lines or ranges selected from a window table to an Excel workbook.

In general, the format of the cells corresponds to the Presto fields, except on special

occasions. In this case user intervention is required to apply the appropriate format to

process your project.

The book can have a pre-designed, so that the cells to export are inserted into selected

calculation sheet, starting at the top left corner and replacing the existing content.

If there are expressions in the remaining cells, updated automatically, also as graphics.

If the worksheet contains a macro called “Presto”, will run after export.

The leaves to export tables are installed by default in the directory defined in the envi-

ronment. This directory is divided into others, which correspond to the names of win-

dows Presto. When you export a window, shows the spreadsheets that exist in the di-

rectory that has the same name as that of the window.

Generate Excel books from templates

The templates are in the “Reports” menu, and can be customized as indicated in “Tem-

plates Excel and Word documents.”

The format of the templates described in “Service request” web of Presto, “Connecting

with other programs: Word and Excel Connection” section.

Access

Import

It imports the information of a work in Access format.

The imported information must appear in tables and fields with the same names as the

corresponding elements of Presto, as are exported with “FILE: Export: Access”. Tables

and unrecognized by Presto fields are ignored.

Records of unique key tables as “concepts”, substitute the equivalent records of the

work of Presto, they already exist. All of the remaining tables are added.

After importing, “FILE: Projects: Check integrity” option is executed.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 314

Export

Create an Access database with all the information of the work and its very structure of

tables and columns. It contains computed columns, which are normally grey.

The exported database can be modified with Access, being responsible for conforming

to their coherence and relational integrity. If it is imported back to Presto, the original

work is obtained, with the changes.

The “Description” field of design of Access table contains help tracks of each Presto

field.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 315

Appendix I. Technical documentation This section contains the information that is not essential for the routine use of Presto,

but can provide relevant technical details for advanced users, such as:

• Directories and files.

• User restrictions.

Directories and files

Presto is installed in the chosen directory by the user, and is the “Installation directory”

on the manual sections.

User and temporary directories defined in the operating system are used.

Win32/64. Program directory

It contains the needed files to run Presto and the auxiliary directories.

File Content

.EXE Executable programs

.DLL Books of the program

Presto.DBE Restrictions

.CFG Configuration files

.LOG File usage auditing

Directory It has

wcca40soft Spelling checker files in Catalan.

Location-specific complementary directories

Directory Name It has

Projects Project Projects and files in various formats for use in imports, im-

ages and drawings.

Reports and tem-

plates

Report Reports, Word and Excel templates.

Reference Reference Databases de precios, cuadro de grupos.

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 316

Directory Name It has

Export layout to

Excel

Excel Subdirectories spreadsheets to export to Excel Presto win-

dows.

Templates work

and reports

Template Subdirectories with projects /Presto reports that are the

basis for creating new projects / reports.

Tutorial Tutorial Works for tutorials.

Wizards Wizard Estimated costs, predimensionadores, QMASS, etc.

Plugins Plugin Programs or executable files.

Help Help Help CHM. files

Data Data .LNG files from different program languages, postal codes

of various locations, etc.

Check “FILE: Working environment: Directories”.

User restrictions

A secure system requires an administrator and a previous security in the network itself,

as well as preparing the individual user settings and the maintenance needed to adapt

the restrictions to the changes required with the time.

The Presto system constraints affect all network users and is activated by the “Activated

restrictions” option from the dropdown list of “FILE: Working environment: Restrictions”

option. If options appear disabled is because there are not enough permissions.The

administrator must have write permission to the Presto setup directory, where a file

“Presto.DBE” is created. Therefore, to maintain security not user except administrator

must have write permission in that directory.

The administrator can set the user profile he wants, and copy the “Pres-

to.PrestoPerfilXml” file in the program directory.

To be operational the system, you must select “Activated restrictions” and enter a

password.

In workstations

“Use restrictions on this computer” option is activated computer by computer. This pre-

vents the user from modifying and customizing menus layouts contained in his work

08/02/2018 RIB Spain 317

profile. The profile can be imported from files preconfigured profiles or use defined by

the administrator.

This option can be assigned at any time; however, you can not unassigned if the Presto

system of constraints is enabled, except that the password is entered.